c 
 
 lN:i?: 
 
 o 
 
n 
 
 O 
 
o 
 
cl 
 
THE ONLY COPY-RIGHT EDI'l.,^, 
 
 RIFL E 
 
 INFANTRY TACTICS, 
 
 REVISED AND IMPROVED 
 
 Maj. Gen. W. J. HARDEE, C. S. ARMY 
 
 SEVENTH EDITION. 
 
 Vol. II. 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 MOBILE : 
 
 S. G. GOETZEL & CO. 
 
 1S63. 
 
Entered, according to' Act of Congress, in the year 1861, by 
 
 S. H. GOETZEL & CO., 
 
 In the Clerk's Office of the District Court of Alabama, for the 
 Confederate States of America. 
 

 NOTICE. 
 
 1^" So many editions of my " INFANTRY 
 AND RIFLE TACTICS " having lately been 
 published, I think it due to both the Public and 
 Publishers to state : 
 
 ^ That the COPYRIGHT EDITION of my 
 INFANTRY and RIFLE TACTICS, published 
 
 by S. H. GOETZEL & CO., in 
 
 Mobile, is the only COMPLETE, CORRECT 
 and REVISED EDITION, and Tins edition 
 ONLY contains the improvements and changes 
 which I have recently made, adapting the manual 
 to the use of the arms generally in the hands of 
 the troops in the Confederate States. 
 
 W. J. HARDEE, 
 Colonel Confederate States Army. 
 Fort Morgan, June 18th, 1861. 
 
Digitized by tlie Internet Arcliive 
 in 2010 witli funding from 
 Dul<e University Libraries 
 
 littp://www.arcliive.org/details/rifleinfantrytac2liard 
 
RIFLE AND mFANTRY TACTICS. 
 
 TITLE FOURTH. 
 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 Formation of the Battalion. 
 
 1. Every colonel will labor to habituate bis bat- 
 talion to form line of battle,, by night as well as by 
 day, with the greatest possible promptitude. 
 
 2. The color company will generally be designated 
 as the directing company. That, as soon as formed, 
 will be placed on the direction the colonel may havo^ 
 determined for the line of battle. The other compa- 
 nies will form on it, to the right and left, on the prin- 
 ciples of successive formations which will be herein 
 prescribed. 
 
 3. The color-bearer may have received the color 
 from the hands of the colonel ; but if there be day- 
 light, and time, the color will be produced with due 
 solemnity 
 
 Composition and march of the color escort. 
 
 4. "When the battalion turns out under arms and 
 the color is wanted, a company other than that of 
 
6 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALI6n— PART I. 
 
 the color, will be put iu march to receive iind escort 
 it. 
 
 5. The II, arch will be in the following order, in 
 quick time, aiiJ without music ; the field music, fol 
 lowed by tb^ b'^^nd ; the escort in column by platoon,- 
 ric'ht in /I'ont, with arms on the right shoulder, and 
 tire cc-^^i"-'>earer between the platoons. 
 
 6. Arrived in front of the tent or quarters of the 
 colonel, the escort will form line, the field music and 
 band on the right, and arms will be brought to a 
 shoulder. 
 
 7. The moment the escort is in line, the color-bear- 
 er, preceded by the first lieutenant, and followed by 
 a sergeant of the escort, will go to receive the color. 
 
 8. When the color-bearer shall come out, followed 
 by the lieutenant and sergeant, he will halt before the 
 entrance ; the escort will present arms, and the field 
 music will sound to the color. 
 
 9. After some twenty seconds the captain will 
 cause the sound to cease, arms to be shouldei'cd, and 
 then break by platoon into column ; the color-bearer 
 will place himself between the platoons, and the lieu- 
 tenant and sergeant will resume their posts. 
 
 10. The escort will march back to the battalion to 
 the sound of music iu quick time, and in the name 
 order as above, the guide on the right. The march 
 will be so conducted that when the escort arrives at 
 one hundred and fifty paces in front of the right of 
 the battalion, the direction of the march will be par- 
 all el to its front, and when the color arrives neary 
 opposite its place in line, the column will change di- 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART I. 7 
 
 rectiou to the left, and the right guide will direct 
 himself on the centre of the battalion. 
 
 Honors paid to the color. 
 
 11. Arrived at the distance of twenty paces from 
 the battalion, the escort will halt, and the music 
 cease ; the colonel will place himself six paces before 
 the centre of the battalion, the color-bearer will "ap- 
 proach the colonel, by the front, in quick time ; when 
 at the distance often paces, he will halt: the colonel 
 will cause arms to be presented and to the color to be 
 sounded, which being executed, the color-bearer will 
 take his place in the front rank of the color-guardj 
 and the battali(»n, by command, shoulder ;irms. 
 
 12. The escort, field music, and band, will return 
 in quick time to their several places in line of battle, 
 marching by the rear of the battalion. 
 
 13. The color will be escorted back to the colonel's 
 tent or quarters in the above order. 
 
 General Rules and Division of the School of the 
 
 m 
 
 Battalion. 
 
 14. This school has for its object the instruction 
 of battalions singly, and thus to prepare them for 
 nwiiceuvres in line. The harmony so indispensable in 
 the movements of many battalions, can only be at- 
 tained by the use of the same commands, the same 
 principles, and tlie same means of execution. Hence, 
 all colonels and actual commanders of battalions will 
 
3 SCHOOL OF THE IJATTALION— PAirr I. 
 
 conform themselves, %vith(»ut addition or curtailment, 
 to what will herein be prescribed. 
 
 15. When a battalion instructed in this drill shall 
 manoeuvre in line, the ct>l()nel A\ill legulate its move- 
 ments, as prescribed in the third volume of the Tac- 
 tics, for heavy infantry. 
 
 16. The school of the battalion will be divided into 
 five parts. 
 
 .17. The first will comprehend opening and closing 
 ranks, and the execution of the ditlerent fires. 
 
 18. The second, the dilTereut modes of passing from 
 the order in battle, to the order in column. 
 
 19. The third, the march in column, and the other 
 movements incident thereto. 
 
 20. The fourth, the different modes of passing from 
 the order in column to the order in battle. 
 
 21. The fifth will comprehend the march in line of 
 battle, in advance and in retreat; the passage of de- 
 files in retreat ; the march by tlie flank ; the forma- 
 tion by file into line of battle; the change <if front ; 
 the column doubled on the centre ; dispositions 
 against cavalry; the rally, and rules for manoeuvring 
 by the rear rank. • 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART I. H 
 
 PART FIRST. 
 
 Opening and closing ranks and the execution of the 
 
 different fires. 
 
 Article First. 
 
 To open and to close ranks. 
 
 22. The colonel, wishing the ranks to be opened, 
 will conimaiid : 
 
 1. Prepare to open ranks. 
 
 23. At this command, the lieu-tenant colonel and 
 major will place themselves on the right of the bat- 
 talion, the first on the flank of the tile closers, and 
 the second four paces from the front rank of the bat- 
 talion. 
 
 24. These dispositions being made, the colonel will 
 command : 
 
 2. To the rear, open order. 3. MARCH. 
 
 25. At the second command, the covering ser- 
 geants, and the sergeant on the left of the battalion, 
 will place themselves four paces in rear of the front 
 rank, and opposite their places in line of battle, in 
 order to mark the new alignment of the rear rank ; 
 they will be' aligned by the major on the left sergeant 
 of the battalion, who will be careful to place himself 
 
10 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION- T^RT I. 
 
 exactly four paces in rear of the front rank, and to 
 hold his piece between the eyes, erect and inverted, 
 the better to indicate to the major the direction to be 
 given to the covering sergeants. 
 
 26. At the command march, the rear runk and the 
 file, closers will step to the rear without counting 
 steps ; the men will pass a little in rear of the line 
 traced for this rank, halt, and dress forward on the 
 covering sergeants, who will align correctly the men 
 of their respective companies. 
 
 27. The file closers will fall back and preserve the 
 distance of two paces from the rear rank, glancing 
 eyes to the right the lieutenant, colonel will, from 
 the right, align them on the file closer of the left, 
 who, having placed himself accurately two paces from 
 the rear rank, will invert his piece and hold it up 
 erect between his eyes, the better to be seen by the 
 lieutenant colonel. 
 
 28. The colonel, seeing t^e ranks aligned, will com- 
 mand : 
 
 4. Front. 
 
 At this command, the lieutenant colonel, major, 
 and the left sergeant, will retake their places in line 
 of buttle. 
 
 29. The colonel will cause the ranks to be closed 
 by the commands prescribed for the instructor in the 
 school of the company, No. 2d. 
 
school of the battalion— part l 11 
 Article Second. 
 
 Manual of Arms. 
 
 30. The ranks being closed, the colonel will cause 
 the following times and pauses. to be executed: 
 
 Present arms. Shoulder arms. 
 
 Order arms. Shoulder arms. 
 
 Support arms. Shoulder arms. 
 
 Fix bayonet. Shoulder arms. 
 
 Charge bayonet. Shoulder arms. 
 
 Unfix bayonet. Shoulder arms. 
 
 Article Third. 
 
 Londing'at will, and the Firings. 
 
 31. The colonel will next cause to be executed, 
 loading at will, by the commands prescribed in th# 
 school of the company No. 4"> ; the officers and ser- 
 geants in the ranks will half face to the right with 
 the men at the eighth time of loading, and will face 
 to the fi'ont when the meu next to them come to a 
 shoulder 
 
 32. The colonel will cause to be executed the fir§ 
 by company, the fire by wing, the fire by battalion, 
 the fire by file, and the fire by rank, by the commands 
 to be herein indicated. 
 
 33. The fire by company and the fire by file will 
 
12 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART L 
 
 always be dU*ect ; the fire by battalion, the fire by 
 wing, and the fire by rank, may be either direct or 
 oblique. 
 
 34. When the fire ought to be ob'ique, the colonel 
 will give, at every round, the caution right (or left) 
 oblique, between the commands ready and aim. 
 
 3&. The fire by company will be executed alter- 
 nately by the right and left companies of each divi- 
 sion, as if the division were alone. The right com- 
 pany will fire first ; the captain of the left will not 
 give his first command till he shall see one or two pie- 
 ces at a ready in the right company; the captain of the 
 latter, after the first discharge, will observe the same 
 rule in respect to the left company ; and the fire will 
 thus be continued alternately. 
 
 36. The coloiuel will observe the same rule in the 
 firing by wing. 
 
 37. The fire by file will commence in all the com- 
 panies at once, and will be executed as has been pre- 
 scribed in the school of the company No. 55 and fol- 
 lowing. The fire by rank will be executed by each 
 rank alternately, as has been prescribed in the 
 school of the company No. 58 and following. 
 
 38. The color-guard will not fire, but reserve itself 
 for the defence of the color. 
 
 The Jive by company. 
 
 39. The colonel wishing the fire by company to be 
 executed, will command : 
 
 1. Firchy comjyany. 2. Commence firing. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART L 13 
 
 40. At the first command, the captains and cover- 
 ing sergeants will take the positions indicated, in the 
 school of the company No. 49. 
 
 41. The color and'its guard will step back at the 
 same time, so as to bring the front rank of the guard 
 in a line with the rear rank of the battalion. This 
 rule is general for all the differejit firings. 
 
 42. At the second command, the odd numbered 
 companies will commence to fire ; their captains will 
 each give the commands prescribed in the school of 
 the company No. 50, observing to precede the com- 
 mand company by that of first, third, fifth, or seventh, 
 according to the number of each. 
 
 43. The captains of the even numbered com- 
 panies will give, in their turn, the same commands, 
 observing to precede them by the number of their 
 respective companies. 
 
 44. In order that the odd numbered companies may 
 not all fire at once, their captains will observe, but 
 only for the first discharge, to give the command fire 
 one after another ; thus, the captain of the third 
 company will not give the command fire until he has 
 heard the fire of the first company ; the captain of 
 the fifth will observe the same rule with respect to 
 the third, and the captain of the seventh the same 
 rule with respect to the fifth. 
 
 45. The colonel will cause the fire to cease by the 
 sound to cease firing ; at this sound, the men will 
 execute what is prescribed in the school of the com- 
 pany No. 63 ; at the sound, for officers to take their 
 places after firing, the captains, covering sergeants, 
 
14 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART I. 
 
 and color-guard, will promptly resuirie tlieir places in 
 line of battle : this rule is general for all the firings. 
 
 The fire by tcing. 
 
 4C. When the evilonel shall wish this fire to be exe- 
 cuted, he will command : 
 
 1. Fire by icing. 2. Right icing. 3. READY. 
 4. AiJM. 5. FiiiE. 6. Load. 
 
 47. The colonel will cause the wings to fire alter- 
 nately, and he will recommence the tire by the com- 
 mands, ]. Right tcing ; 2. AlM ; 3. FlRE ; 4. LoAD. 
 1. Left wing; 2. AlM; 3. FiiiE ; 4. LoAD ; in con- 
 forming to what is prescribed No. 35. 
 
 The fire by battalion. 
 
 48. The colonel will cause this fire to be executed 
 by the command!^ last prescribed, substituting for 
 the first two, 1. Fire by battalion; 2. Battalion. 
 
 The fire by file. 
 
 49. To cause this to be executed, the colonel will 
 command : 
 
 1. Fire by file. 2. Battalion. 3. Ready. 
 
 4. Commence firing. 
 
 50. At the fourth command, the fire will commence 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART L 15 
 
 on the right of each company, as prescribed in the 
 school of the company, No. 57. Th*e colonel may, if 
 he thinks proper, cause the fire to commence on the 
 right of each platoon. 
 
 The fire hy rank 
 
 51. To cause this fire to be executed, the colonel 
 will command : 
 
 1. Fire hy rank. 2. Battalion. 3. READY. 4. Rear 
 rank. 5. Aoi. 6. FiRE. 7. Load. 
 
 52. This fire will be executed as has been ex- 
 plained in the school of the compaliy No. 59, in fol- 
 lowing the progression prescribed for the two ranks 
 which should fire alternately. 
 
 To fire by the rear rank. 
 
 53. When the colonel shall wish the battalion to 
 fire to the rear, he will command : 
 
 1. Face by the rear rank. 2. Battalion. 
 
 3. About— Face. 
 
 54. At the first command, the captains, covering 
 sergeants, and file closers will execute what has 
 been prescribed in the school of the company No. 
 69 ; the color-bearer will pass into the rear rank, and 
 for this purpose, the corporal of his file will step be- 
 
16 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PA kT I. 
 
 fore the corporal next on his right to let the color- 
 bearer pass, and will then take his place in the front 
 rank; the lieutenant colonel, adjutant, major, ser- 
 geant major, and tbe music will place themselves be- 
 fore the front rank, and face to the rear, each oppo- 
 site his place in the line of battle— the first two pass- 
 ing around the right, and the others antund the left 
 of the battalion. 
 
 55. At the third command, the battalion will face 
 about; the captains and covering sergeants observ- 
 ing what is prescribed in the school of the company 
 
 No. 70. 
 
 56. The battalion facing thus by the rear rank, the 
 colonel will cause it to execute the different fires by 
 the same commands as if it were faced by the front 
 rank. 
 
 57. The right and left wings will retain the same 
 designations, although ficed about r the companies 
 also will preserve their former designations, as first, 
 second, third, &c.' 
 
 58. The fire by file will commence on the left of 
 each company, now become the right. 
 
 59. The fire by rank will commence by th^ front 
 rank, now become the rear rank. This rank will 
 preserve its denomination. 
 
 60. The captains, covering' sergeants, and color- 
 guard will, at the first command given by the co- 
 lonel, take the places prescribed for them in the fires, 
 with the front rank leading. 
 
 61. The colonel, after firing to the rear, wishing to 
 face the battalion to its proper front, will command : 
 
^'CHOOL OF THK BATTALION -PART I. 17 
 
 1. Face by the front rank. 2. Battalion. 3. About 
 Face. 
 
 62. At these commalids, the battalion will return 
 to its proper fi«out by-the iioeans-prescribed "Nos. 54 
 and 55. 
 
 63. The fire by file being th^t most used in war, 
 the colonel will give it the preference in the prepara- 
 tory exercises, in order -that the battalion may "be 
 brought to execute- it with the greatest possible re- 
 gHlarity. 
 
 64. When the colonel may wish'to give some re- 
 laxation to the battalion, without breaking the ranks, 
 he will execute wjiat- has been prescribed in th^ 
 school of the colnp^ny Nos. 37 and 38, or.Nos! 39 
 and 40. 4 
 
 65. When thejcolonel shall wisli to cause arms to 
 be stacked, he will bring the battalion to ordered 
 arifis, and* then command: 
 
 1. Stack — Arms. 2. Jircak ranks. 3. March." 
 
 66. The colonel wishing the men to return to the 
 ran)is, will cause^ attention to be sounded, at which 
 the'battalion will re-foj-m behind the stacks of arms. 
 The SDund being finished, the colonel, after -causing 
 tiie stacks to be broken, will conijuand : 
 
 Battalion. 
 
18 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART U. 
 
 "67. At this command, the men will fix -their atten- 
 tion, and remain immovable.' 
 
 PART SECOND. 
 
 Diffctent morhs of passing frdm the order in battle to 
 the order in column. 
 
 Arjicle First. 
 
 To break Jo the right or left into column. 
 
 68. Lines of battle will babitiially break inio 
 colnmii by company; they may also break by division 
 or by platoon. 
 
 . 69. It is here supposed that the cdouel wishes to 
 break by company to the I'ight ; ^le'will command : 
 
 1. By company, right ichecl. 2. March (or double 
 quick— March). . 
 
 70. At the first commahd,.eaeh' captain •willplkce 
 himself rapidly before the centre of his company, and 
 caution it thnt it h;is to whegl to the right ; each cov- 
 ering sergeant will replace his captain in the front 
 rank. 
 
 71. At the command march, each x'.ompnuy will 
 break to the right, according to- the principles pre- 
 scribed in the school of the company No. 173;. each 
 captain wilj, confoini himself to what is prescribed 
 for the chiefs of platoon; the left gnide, as soon as 
 ho can pass, will plivee himself on j:he left of the 
 
'JA. 
 
 mm m r- 
 
 HiiiiiiiiiiM ttr 
 
 Hiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiir 
 
SCHOOL OF THH BATTALION— P^RT II. 19 
 
 front rank to cnoiluet the iniirdijng fljiiik, and vvheiL 
 he shall have 'ajipfoaehed.ncar to the q^erpendjculjjT, 
 the captain •Mill coniuicund : ]. Such ccrmp any. ^r 
 Halt.. 
 
 72. At the_^eco-nd e;>iniTfaiid, which will' be given at 
 the instant the left jtnide shall beat the tHstinic^ of 
 three paces from the*perpendicuhtr, the compHuy 
 will halt ; the jjuide will advance afiei*-|i]ace his ItAft 
 arm li^rhtly against the hreast of the ciplaiii, who 
 will establish hfrn oii tht3.;i,lii>nment of ttie; man who 
 has faced to the right; the* covering sei;^eant will 
 place himself correctl^^ on the alignn^nt on the right 
 of thai man ; .wliich being executed, the c;tptfiin will 
 align his company by the left^ command; Fii'oxT» aud 
 place hitnself two paces before rts centre'. 
 
 73. Th(i captains Iwiving commanded Front, the 
 gnides, altlic>i|l;?h some (jT "themynny not be in the di- 
 rection of th*e pi-eceding guides, will stand fast, in 
 order that the err«r of ;t c'ompany that haswheekd 
 too much or -too little mriy nofc^lje propagatf^d ; the 
 guides not in the direction will readily come into it 
 when the colunm.is put iirmarch. ; 
 
 74. A battalion in liiie of battTe will break irifo' 
 column by company to the \eft', according to the satne 
 principles, and by Inverse jneans; the covering set- 
 geant of each -company -will' conduct the marching 
 iiank, and the left gJiiAti will plage himself oa the left of 
 the front rank at fhe moment tire oompaity halts. 
 
 75. "When the battalion breaks by division, the in- 
 dication diiision will be substituted in the commands 
 fit that oiQoiiipany ; the chief of each division fthe 
 senior gaptmn) will 'conform himself to what is pre 
 
;iO PCHQjOI- of THK BATTALION— PART 11. 
 
 scribed for th^ cl^ief. of company, andnvill place him- 
 sejr two paces before the (,'ent)«e of ly? division; the 
 junior c<'tptain,»jf not already theuo, vviH place Lim- 
 self in the interval bet\Vee:i tlie two companies in 
 the front rank, and be ^vei-ed by the covering ser- 
 geant of. the left company in the rcjir rank. The 
 riglit guide of the rij^ht company wilf be the right 
 guide, and the left guide of the left company, the left 
 guides of the^ division. 
 
 76. \Vh^ii the battalion shall Jjreark by platoon to 
 the'right pr to the left, each first lieutenant will i)ass 
 arouii<i the left of his company to place liimself in 
 front of the second platoon, and' for tbis^purpose each 
 covering sergeant, except the one of th'e righ£ com- 
 p.'^n^-will step, for the moment, in rear, of the right 
 file "of his company. 
 
 77. When the battalion lireaks by division to the 
 right, and there is an odd 1:?t»nipan^, thc*c-a|>tain of 
 this company, (the left), after wliejjllng into column, 
 will causae it to oblique to the left, hafltvit at company 
 distance from^ the preceding division, place his left 
 guide on the direction of the coluum, and then "align 
 his company by the left. When tfie line breaks by 
 division to the left, the odd company will be in front; 
 its captain, having wheeled it iuto.column, Will cause 
 it to oblique to the right, halt.it at division distance 
 from the division next in the rear, ])lace his right 
 guide on the directioit of the other guides, and align 
 the compt^ny by the right. 
 
 78. The battalion being in ctdumn, the lieutenant 
 colonel and major will-place them^elveti. i)n the .di 
 rectiug flank, the first abreast witli the 'leading sub- 
 
SCHOOb OF THE BATTALION— PART II. 01 
 
 division, and the other abreast with the last, ajid 
 both sjx paces frt)ra the flank. The adjutant wiW be 
 near the -lieutenant colonel, and the sergeant major 
 near the major. - 
 
 79. The colonel will have no £xed place as the in- 
 structor of his battfrtfon ;«btrt in* coMbus composed, of 
 many battalions, he will place himself hj^itually on 
 the directing flank fifteen or twenty paees from the 
 guides, and abreast with the centre of his battalion. 
 
 80. When the colpnel shall wish to move the 
 column forward wiUhout halting it, he will cautipn 
 the battalion to that etfect, and command : * - 
 
 1. By company right tche'el. 2. MARCH for double 
 quick — March.) 
 
 81. At the first commjind, the captains of the com- 
 panies will execute what is prescribed for breaking 
 
 " into C(duaiB from a halt. 
 
 82. At the second command, they will remi^in in 
 front oT 4;heir companies to superintend the move- 
 ment ; the 'companies will wh'eel to .the right on fixed 
 pivots as indicated in the school of the company No. 
 185 ; the' left guides vvill conform to what is, prescribed 
 above ; when they shall arrive near the perpendicu- 
 lar, the colonel will command : 
 
 3. Forward, 4. March. 5. Guide left. 
 
 83. At. the t-hird command, each covering sergeant 
 will' place himself by the right side of the man on 
 
22 SCHOOL OF THE RATTALKJN— i'AR'f 11. 
 
 the ligbt of the front rank <;f his eoinpaiiy. At the 
 fouilfh eouiniaiKlj_ which will he ffiTX^n at "tlie iiistaiit 
 the-Mheel is completed, the conipauies will cease to 
 wheel and march straiylit forward.- At the fifth, the 
 men will take the touch of elbows to the left. The 
 leading guide wiU,in!sich ;u the dij-ection indicated to 
 .him by the li^i'tenant colorffel. The guides will im- 
 mediately •conform tti^^'uiselves 'to the prmciples of the 
 inarch in colUuiu, school of the company. No. 2()0 and 
 following. 
 
 84. If the Uattalion be marelijng in line of battle, 
 th-e colondl w-ill cause it to wheel tx> tire right <»r left, 
 by the same commands and same means ; but he 
 should previously caution the battalion thalr it' is to 
 cciiitinue the march. 
 
 85. A battalion in line of battle will break into 
 column by compa'ny to the left, according to the same 
 principles, and by inverse means ; the covering ser- 
 geant of each company wHl conduct the marching 
 flank, and the left;- guides wiirplace themselves on the 
 left of their respective companies at the command 
 
 forward. 
 
 86.' When a battalion has to prolong itself in.culumn 
 towards the right or lett, or h«s to direct its march 
 in column perpendicularly or diagonally in front> or 
 in rear of either flank. The colonel will cause it to 
 break by company to the right or left, as has just 
 been prescribed ; but when the line breaks to the 
 right, iu order to march towards the k*ft, or the re- 
 verse, the "colonel will command: Break to4hc rig)it 
 to inarch to the left, or Irreak io the left to viarch to the 
 right, before giving the command, by compavy, right 
 (oi^left) icheel. As soon as the battalion is broken, 
 the lieutenant colonel w:iH place a marker abreast with 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALIQN— PMIT II. 23 
 
 the right guide of the leading Company. The instant 
 the coluuin is put in motion, this eompatiy '?V'ill wheel 
 to the left (or*right) mai'x.*h" ten pace's to the front 
 without changing the gurile, and. wlieel again to the 
 left (-or right). The second Avheel being compjeted, 
 the captiiin will inimediately-comniand guide left (5r 
 right). The gilide of.this i^ompanywilT m.nch in a 
 dirgction parallel to the guides of the column. The- 
 lieuten;int colr)nel uill be careful t6 place a second 
 marker at .the point where the first company is to 
 change difeclion the sectnid time. 
 
 Articee Second. 
 To break to the rear, by the right or left, into 
 column, -and to advance or retire by' tht right or 
 left, of j:ompames. 
 
 87. When the colonel shall wish to cause the.bat- 
 taliou to break to the rear, by the right, into co.lumn 
 by company, he will counnand : 
 
 1. By the right of companies to the rear into oolumn. 
 
 2. Battalion right— Face. 3. March (or doublf. 
 
 quick —Mahch.) 
 
 S3. At the first command, each captain will place 
 himself befoi-e the centre of his company, and cau- 
 tion 4f to face to the right; the covering sergeants 
 will step into the trout rank. ' 
 
24 e^CIidbl, OF THE BATTALi N— PART II. 
 
 89. At .the second cIiuyTiand, the bailiilidii will face 
 to the right ; 'fach captuiii will haste^ to the right of 
 his company, and break two files to4he rear ; tlif first 
 file. will break thie whole depth of^he two ranks; the 
 second file less; whi^h being executed, the captain 
 will placfe, himself so lh;(t his breast may touch light- 
 ly theieft arm of thv front raiilt man of the last file 
 in the company^next on the right of his own. The 
 captain of the ri^ght company will place himself as if 
 there were a ctmipaUy on his right, aijd will align 
 himself on the other captamS. The c'overing sergeant 
 of each company will break to the rear with the right 
 files, and^ place himself before the front rank of the 
 first file, to cohduct him. 
 
 90. At, the command march, the first file of each 
 company will wheel to the right ; the covering ser- 
 geant, placed before this -file, will conduct it perpen- 
 diculaily to the rear. The other file* will fonre suc- 
 cessively to wheel oh the same spot. The captains 
 witr stand fast, see their companies file past, and at 
 the instant the last file shall have wheeled, each cap- 
 tain will command : 
 
 1. Such company. 2. Halt. 3 Front. 4. Left — 
 Dress. 
 
 91. At the instant the company faces to t}ie front, 
 its left guide will place himself so that his left arm 
 may touch lightly the breast of his captain; 
 
 92. At the fourth command, the comprtny will align 
 itself on its left guide*, the captain so directing it, 
 
SCHOOL "F THE BATTALION— PARTJI. 25 
 
 that the new alignment ijiay be perpendicular to that 
 which the company had occupied in line of battle, 
 and, the better to ju^ge this, he will step back two 
 paces from the fliii\k. ^ - . 
 
 93. The company being* fUigned, the captaJu^wiU 
 command: FiioNT, and take his place before its 
 centre. 
 
 94. The battalion marching in line of battle, when 
 the cohtnel shall wish to break into column by com- 
 pany, to the rear, by the right, he WiW command : 
 
 1. By the right of companies yo the rear into column. 
 2. Battalion by the right Jlanlc- 3. March (or 
 double fjmck) — MARCH, 
 
 95. At the first commantl, each captain will step 
 briskly in front of the centre of his company, and 
 caution it to face by the right flank. 
 
 96. A.t the command march, the battali<m will face 
 to tlie right;, each captain will move rapidly to the 
 right of his company and cause it to bi'eak to^the 
 right; the first file of each company will wheel to 
 the rigtit, and the covering sergeant placed in front 
 of this file will conduct it-perpendiciilarly to the rear; 
 the (tther files will wheel successively at the. same 
 place as the first. T-he captains will see their com 
 panics file past them ; when the last files have wheel-' 
 ed, the colonel will command: 
 
 3. Battalion, by the left flank — March. 
 4. Guide left. 
 
26 SCIIQDL OF THE BATTALION— PART II. 
 
 97. At tlie ct)inuuiii<l march, the coniprtiiies will 
 face to the left-, and .march ju column mi the new di- 
 rection. The captains will plac^ then. selves in front of 
 tlie centres of their .n spectiye comp.mies. At the 
 fourth commaiid, the guides will c'ouforni to the prin- 
 ciples of the march in .c»>lunin; the leading one will 
 move in the direction indicated -to him by the lieu- 
 tenant Colonel. The men will take the touch of el- 
 bows to the left. 
 
 98. To break to the rear by the left, the colonel 
 will .give the same commands as in the c.ise of break- 
 ing to the rear by the right, sub^itut'ingthe indica- 
 tion left for that of right. 
 
 99. The movement will -be executed according to 
 the same principles. Each c;»ptain will hasten to the 
 left of his'cqmpany, cause the first two files to break 
 to the rear, and then place his breast against the right 
 file of the com'pany next- on the left of. his own, iiithe 
 manner prescribed above. 
 
 . 100. As Foyn as the two files, break to the rear, the 
 left guide of each company will place hinjself before 
 the front rank man of the headmost filt), to conduct 
 hiiy. 
 
 101.. The instiint the companies face to the front, 
 the right guide of each will )dace himself so hiat-his 
 right aiin may'lightly touch the breast of his'captain. 
 
 102. The battalion may be broken by division to 
 • the rear, by the right or left, in'like manner; in this 
 case,- the indication divisions will be substituted, in 
 the first command, for that.of coiiipamcs ; the chiefs 
 of division will conform themselves to what is {H'e- 
 scribed for the cliiefs of company. The jtmior cap- 
 tain in each division will place himself, when the cli- 
 
SCHO )L OF THE BATTALION— PART U. -27 
 
 vision faces to a' flank, by -the &ide of the covering ser- 
 geant of the 'left company, who steps into th« front 
 rank. 
 
 103. If there be fin (rdd number of couipames^and 
 the battalion breaks jjyjdiyision .t<i the rear, whether 
 by the j-ight or le'ft? the captain of t! e,left company 
 will conforin'to what is'prescribeil No. 77,. ■» 
 
 104. This Manner of breaking inio columji being at 
 once the most promp't and 'rejjular, wiH be. puel'erfed 
 oiT actual service, unless there be some* particular 
 reason for breaking to the front. 
 
 105. If *lie b«ttalion be in line and at a balt» 
 and the colonel sht)uld wish to advance or retire by 
 the right of companies, he will command : 
 
 1. By the right of companies to the front {or rear.) 
 
 2. Battalion, right— FACE. 3. March (or double 
 
 ywicA:— March.) 4. (7uidc right, (hft^ or (cen- 
 tre.) 
 
 106. At thgi first command, each captain will move 
 rapidly two paces in front of the centre oflTis com- 
 pany, and caution it to face to the right; the cover- 
 ing sei-geaiits will replace the captain's in the front 
 rank. . 
 
 107. At the second command, Ihe battalion will 
 flice«to the right, and each captain n^oving quickly 
 to the rigl'.t of his company will cause files to break 
 to the front, according to the principles indicated 
 No. 89. 
 
 108. At the command march, each cnptaMi jdacing 
 hin)self on the left of his.leading guide will conduct 
 his company perpendicularly to the original line. At 
 
28 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART U. 
 
 the fourt-h command, ttie gaide of ea'ch company will 
 dress t^ the right, left or centre, accorfKng to the in- 
 dication given, taking care to preserve accurately his 
 distance. 
 
 109. If the colonel should wish to move to the 
 front, or i"^ar, by the left o*f feam-panies, the move- 
 ment will be executed by "tlfe same mf?ans and the 
 same comm'andf substituting left fov r^lit. 
 
 •110. If'the battflli(m be in march, and the- colonel 
 should vvish to advanc*^ or retire by the right of com- 
 panies, he will command : 
 
 1. By the ri^ht of companies to^lie front (ox rear.) 
 2. Battalion, "ly the right flank. , ' 3. March (or 
 double quick — MARCH.) 4. Guide right, {left) or 
 {centre.) 
 
 ill. Which will be executed- according to the 
 principles .and means prescribed Nos. 95 and fdllow- 
 ing, and 106 and following. At -the first command, 
 the .color and general guides will take their places as* 
 in column, , • 
 
 112. If the colonel should wish to advance or re- 
 tire by the left of companies, the' movement will be 
 executed by the same means and the ^ame com- 
 mands,- substitutiqg /c//5 for rio^/tf. 
 
 ■113.' If the battalion be advancing by the right or 
 left of companies, and the colonel should wish to 
 form line to the front, he will commajid : 
 
 1. By companies into line. 2 March (or double 
 quick— ^Iarcu.) 3. Guide centre. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART II. 29 
 
 114. At the command march, briskly repeated by 
 the captains, each- cempany will be formed into line, 
 as prescribed in thg school of the .company, No. 15 f. • 
 
 115. At the third command, t^e color And genej-al 
 guides will move rapidly to theic pliwcr^ in line, 
 as will be hereinafter prescribed No. 405. 
 
 116. If the bijttalioa be retiring "by the right or 
 left of companies, ai\d the colouel should wish to 
 form line facing. the enemy, he will first cause the 
 companies tcf face about while*marching, and imme- 
 diately form. in lineLby the commands and means pre- 
 scribed N«s. 113 and foMoWing. 
 
 Article Third. 
 To ploy the'battation into close column. 
 
 •117. Thi^ inovement may be executed by company 
 or by division, on the right or left subdivision, or on 
 any other suljdivision, right (tr left in front. • 
 
 ] 1-8. The examples in th'is school will suppose the 
 presence of four divisions, with directions for an 
 odd company ; but what wilt»be prescribed for four, 
 will'serve equally for two, three, -or five divisions. 
 
 119. To ploy the battalign info close column by 
 division in rear of the first, the colouel will command: 
 
30 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART JL 
 
 ]. Close column, by dicision. 9,.' On ihc Jir^t divl- 
 ^^sion, right in fvimt. ?>. Battalion, right— ^F act. 
 ' 4' MarCII (\\r doyMc quick— HsIarcu .) 
 
 J"20. At the second 'comniand, all the chiefs i-i" 
 division will p^ace'thcniselves befpre the centres, of 
 ttieir divis'ftins ; the chief of the first will caution it 
 to stand fast ; the ciiiefs of the.three^others will re- 
 mind them that thejj.mll.-hav€i to face to the right, and 
 the covering seygean* of the right compiuiy of eaV'h 
 division will replace his captain ■iu' the front nnil^ 
 "soon as the latter stQps out. ' 
 
 12V. At the third command, the last three divi- 
 sions will face to the riglit; the chief of each division 
 will hasten to its eight, and effuse files to be broken 
 to the rear, as indicated No. 89; the right guide 'will 
 break at the sumo time, and pla*ce himself before the 
 front rank man of the first Me, to- cpncluct him, and 
 each chief of divisio'i*will place himself by the side 
 of this guide. ' • 
 
 • 
 
 122. The- moment these divisions face to the 
 right ilm Junior captain in each will place himself on 
 the left of the covering sergeant of the left company, 
 who will place himself in .the front rank. This rule 
 is general for all the ploy ments by divi&ifin. 
 
 123, At the command- m^?rc/i, ihe -chief, of the first 
 division will add : guuh left ; at this, its left guide 
 will place himself on its left, as soon as the move- 
 ment of the second'-divisi^jn-'may iiermit,'and the. file 
 closers will advance t>ne pace upon the rear rank. 
 
30 
 
 ]. Cloi 
 
 , , sion, 
 
 ■4. W 
 
 120. 
 divimn 
 their d 
 to staiK 
 niindth' 
 the .co'j 
 divisior 
 soon as 
 
 12]'. 
 sions w 
 will hat 
 to the r" 
 break a. 
 front r; 
 each ch 
 of this 
 
 122. 
 
 right j;h 
 the left 
 who wi 
 is gcncr 
 
 123. . 
 
 divihiini 
 will pl{ 
 me lit 
 closers 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART IL 31 
 
 124. All the other divisions, each conckicted by its 
 chief, will stejj off togetheu, to take their pl.icee in 
 the p(tliimn; the seeonii will gain, in- wiieeliiig' by 
 file to the-i-ear, the space of sijc paces, W'hich ought 
 to separate its? guide from the guide of the first di- 
 vision, and'so direct its inarch as to ^utej- the culunm 
 on a line [parallel t<> this division ; the thi^d ^i^'id fcnirth 
 divisions will direct themselves diagonnlly towards, 
 btit a little in rear of, the points at which they ought, 
 respectively, to enter the column} at six paces from 
 the teffc rtaidvof the column, the head of each of these 
 divisions will incline ar little to the left, in ordiM* to 
 enter the column as has just been prescribed for the 
 second, taking care also to leave the distance of six 
 paces between its gjide and the* guide of the pre- 
 ceding division. At the .moment .the divisions put 
 themselvt^s in niarch to enter the column, the file 
 closers of each will incline to the left, so as to ijrjng 
 themselves to the ^istancaof a pace from the rear 
 rank. '♦ • - . 
 
 125. Each chief of these thi'ce •diviiiions will con- 
 duct his <JiYis.i(h^ti-llhe shall be up with the guide tp 
 the directing one ; the chief'will then himself haJt, 
 see his division ^le past, and halt it -the iustant the 
 last file shall have passed, commanding*: i..Suc/i di- 
 vision; 2. Halt; 3. Front; 4. Left— Dress. 
 
 126. At ttiB second command, the division will halt; 
 the left g.ujde will place hfmself promptly on the di- 
 rection, six paces-from the guide which precedes him, 
 in order.that, the column being formed,' the. divisions 
 may bQ saparated- the distiwee of four paces. 
 
S8 SCHOOL. OF THE BATTALT N— PART II. 
 
 127. At the third command, the division will fuce 
 to tbe front; at the- louutf, it will be aliji^ned by its 
 chief, who wiH place himself^ two puces ontside of his 
 guide, and direct .the^ alignment so that his division 
 utny be panillel to that which precedes— which being 
 done, he will cl)mmand, ^1<-R(>N'1', and place himself 
 before the cylitre of his division. 
 
 128. If any division, after the command froiij,, be 
 not at its proper distance* and ti^s can only happen 
 through the negligence of jts chief, such divUioil will 
 remain in its place, in order that the fault may not be 
 propagated. 
 
 129. The colonel will superintend the execution of 
 the movemeut, and calise the prescribed principles to 
 be observed. 
 
 130. The lieutenant cofonel, pli^jjing himself in suc- 
 cession in rear of the left guides, will assure them on 
 the direction as they arfive, and then move to his 
 place outside of the left flank. of tBe ctJunin six ^iaces 
 from, and ab'reast ^vith, the first division. I" as- 
 suriHg th^' guifles on the directibti, he wilt \q a mere 
 observer, nnless»one or more should failto cover ex- 
 actly the guide or guides already- ei^ablished. This 
 rule is general. •. 
 
 131. The nraj or will- follow the movemeTit abreast 
 with the left of the fourth division, and tifterwards 
 take his position outside of the left flank- of the col- 
 umn, six paces from, andabreast w'ith, this^ division. 
 
 132. To ploy the battalion infront. of £lie first divi- 
 sion, the. c.olonel wil-1 give the ^me coinn)and, sub- 
 stituting the indication left {i>v that of r/^/^/i/ in front. 
 
tiCllUOL OF THE BAITALION— i'AliT li 33 
 
 133. At the .second and tLy-d compands, the chiefs 
 of division and the junior captanis ^^ill conform them- 
 selves to what is prescribed, Nos. 120, ] 2 J, 122; but 
 the chiefs of the last three divisiorfs, instead of caus- 
 ing the first two files to'break t64;he rear, will cause 
 them to bi-eak to the front, 
 
 134. At the fouRh command, the chief of the first 
 division will idd: "6'M^Ver^o^^^« 
 
 135. The three other divisions will step off together 
 to take their places in the-c<Jumn in front ftf the di- 
 recting division ; eaclr wifl direct itself as.jwescribed, 
 Net. 124, and will enter in guch manner that, whefi' 
 halted, its guide -tfiaj^ find himself-six paces from .the 
 guide of, the division next previously esta]>lished' in 
 the colunyi. 
 
 136. Each chief of thetse divisions will conduct hiB^ 
 divisioy, tilt his night guide shtill be nearly up with 
 the guide of the fjireofting one ; he mAW th^u-halt-his 
 division, an'd cause it to face to the frojit; at the in- 
 stant it halts, its. right guide will face to the rear, 
 place hitnself six paces n-om the preceding guide, 
 and cover him exactly— ^which bbing done, the chief 
 will align his ditisjonbythe rigWf. 
 
 137. The lieutenant colonel, place'd in front of the 
 right gui^e of the first division, will assure the guides 
 on tlie direction asj they successivoly arrive, and then 
 move outside (f the right itrmk of the column, to a 
 point six paces-from, .-wid abreast with, the fourth di- 
 vision, now in fronli. . 
 
 138. The inbjor will conform himself to what is 
 prescribed, No. 13i, and then move outside of. the 
 right flank of tjie column, six paces from, and abreastr 
 with; the first division, Jiow in rear. 
 
 3 
 
34 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART 11. 
 
 •J 30. The movQmeiit lacing ended, tlje colonel will 
 command : 
 
 Guides, ahon{ — Face. 
 
 140. At this, the guic^s, who are*f\i^ed to the rear, 
 will fiice to the front. 
 
 141. To ploy the battalion inTear, Or in front of the 
 fourth division, the colonel will comnumd : 
 
 1. Close, cohfvin hy division. 2. On the fourth divi- 
 sion, If^i (orriffht) izt front. 3. Battaliun, lift — 
 Face. 4 Mkrcu (iix.douifte quick — March.) 
 
 142. Tkese movements will be executed a-ccording 
 to the pryiciples of tliose which precede, but by in- 
 verse means ; the fourth division on \vhich the bat- 
 talion ploys wili. stand fast; the in^nt the uuwement 
 eoihmeivces, its "chiet" vyill ^orA^"fta«d, guide right [or 
 left,} 
 
 : 143. The foregoing examples "embrace all the prin- 
 ciples: thus, wh^n'the colpnel shuTLwish to ploy the 
 battalion on an intei»©a" division,. h*e will cbmmand: 
 
 >. Close column by division. 2. On suQh* division ^ 
 figM Cor left) % front. 3 Batialioh imcctrds — 
 Face. 4. yi.\KQiii^v double quicli>—MM\c\\.) 
 
 J 44. The instant th'e movement cfl'himenc.es, .the 
 chief of the directing division vyill commaiid, guide 
 left (or right,) 
 
 145. The divisions which, jn the order in. battle, 
 
SCH€OL OF THEIUTTALrdN— PAR'IMI. 35 
 
 am ^* tke riglkt of,M«? (lirec-tii)g' divis5ii>n,,will face to 
 the left ;. tltt'^e vvbiSh aVo to the leffr; vvilfftvc^ to.ttie 
 right. ,'* . . • 
 
 14G. If the fi^ht is To In? iti'^front^rtlie' righlrttiv!- 
 siotiR will ploy iji front of thcdfc^cting division, and 
 the left in its rear*; the i-tverse, if ,thei left is to" be in 
 front. And in all tUe fowg/Tiag snp|>i»skions, thcdi- 
 vision hi- diiiijions «onti^nuus to iEe dfi'Qctiiigj.cnie, in 
 wheelinir by file to the^front or renr, .vvilf.<t^iin-.the 
 space of six paces, whiT>h okigSt ' to separat(5 -their 
 gnides from the^guidl? «ff tlie'directfing divisitvn. 
 
 147. In'allit'he pl/iylVients on an. ^interior divisic^n, 
 the licirtemi-u* cgloneJ wi-W.as'sure thVpositiorls of -the 
 gnides in front, Tindth(5 major those in the rearof thjB' 
 directing div^ion. . , • 
 
 148. If th-ei)attalion.be in n3{|i'{?ti,instea(r of at a 
 halt, the movement will Ijc. executed by coiut)iflljig 
 the two*gaits_of quick .'yuldoubh^ }jl.iick time, iind al- 
 ways iti rear of ofie of the 1\aul^ ditisirlhs. 
 
 .14J^ The battalion being in march^to pley it in rear 
 of the first division, the ccjonel will command: 
 
 1. Closc^ column hy division'.'' 2. 'On the 'first dicislon. 
 
 3. Uattalioh-^y-,the right flank. 4. Double quick 
 
 — March. 
 
 150. A^the second' command, each chief of division 
 wilt move rapidly before the centre' of his diyieion 
 and caution it to face to the^ri^t. 
 
 15L The chief of the first division-will; caution it 
 to coiitinue»to march to the front, Hnd he will com- 
 mand : Qifick march. 
 
3fi S<fHUUL OF'THK BAl^AWON— PART If.' 
 
 152. At thp commtind march, tiie^cliief of *he >fij-st 
 dlpUioii Twill"toir!i»aii(l : Giddc left.' At ttrts,.the left 
 g.uia(^ will inoye to.lhe left ilaiik of the division and 
 d hx'c ti him self ^n the ^)aint indicated. '* 
 
 156T The thive *»pier.divii^ons will face to the right 
 aiid move' oif iai douWe* qnick T-iuic, bKeakiug to the 
 right to take Iftenr pkcos in column; ea»h chief of 
 division will move nujidly to |he right, ^f his division 
 in order to conduct i-t. The ftles will.be careful to 
 preserve their distitnces/aiid tp^tfiawl^with a uniform 
 aiKi- decided step. The colof-lliiiarcr innd general 
 -gUicles wilH'etaEe ^Jieir plaifesiB.thejran.ks. 
 
 151. The second.' divisitm- will ijnmt?«Iiately enter 
 tte^olumn, marching parallel' to the first division ; 
 its. chief will allow it" to-file past him", aiid wjien tfie 
 laet file is abregiiSt'-of bini, <yill comma lul: • 1; Second 
 division, hy the left flaiik — MauCH 2. Gui(k left, 
 and j)lace httfisetf in front of the centre of his4<iivi- 
 gign. 
 
 155. At the command march, tl\p division will face 
 to the left; nt the 'second command, the lelt guide 
 will march in the trace of the left ^uide of the first 
 division; the men' will takis" the tjpucb -of elbows to 
 the left. When the second divisron^htis closed' to its 
 proper distance, its chijf will command : Qiiioh time 
 — March. This division will then change its step to 
 quick time. 
 
 156." The chiefs of .the third' and fotirth. divisions 
 will execute their movements according to tihe same 
 principles, taking cai*e- ti> gain iis much ground as 
 possible towards the- head of the column. . 
 
 157. If the battalit)n had been-previously marching 
 in line at double quick time, when the fourth <livision 
 
SCHOCA OF THE BATTALF'N— PART III. 37 
 
 shall have eafiued its distuuce, the- celouel -will ^era- 
 mand : Damlc quiQk — March. 
 
 158. .In this movemeiit^the lieirtena-nt cpTonel XK'TIl 
 move rapidly to the side /tf the leading guide, give 
 him a point of dire^tFon, and thien follow the move- 
 ments of the first division. 'The major will foHovV 
 the movement ubteiist with the Iftft of the fourtii'tli.* 
 virion. 
 
 Remarks on ploying the battalion into column. 
 
 - . • • . /" 
 
 159. The bffttsiiiou may be ployejT 4ftto coliumn at 
 full, or half distan(?e, on the same principles, iuid by 
 the same -commandg, sabstjtutiug tor the first com- 
 mand: Column at full {oy ftttlf) distancc'ly (livisJ,on 
 
 *• r , •! * 
 
 160. In thtibployments and ibovements 'm column, 
 when the subdivisions execute ttie mdv^mervts suc- 
 cessively, such as— to take or close distances*; to 
 change directioi^^ by tke flank of subdivisions, e^ch. 
 chief of s\ibdis'ision ."s^ill Cause his men to support 
 arms after having aligned it ajid commanded Front. 
 
 .PARTraiRD. 
 
 Article First, 
 
 To march in column at full distance.- 
 
 161. When the colonel shall wish to put the col- 
 umn iji marclit he will indicate to tfie Jeading guide 
 two distinct objects in front, on»the line which the 
 guide ought to follow. This guide will immediately 
 
38 SCIIO(iL -F THE BATTALiON— ^RT HI. 
 
 pu* his shoulders- in a square with-tbat*liiic, take the 
 more dista! t X)l)ject as the pidnt ot *dire(5tit)n, and the 
 rujarer- «ue as the jtitermoduile point. 
 • • 
 
 16"2. If only a single prinniucnj; tftyect prcspnt itself 
 in the direction tlit) gukle l^as to follow, he will face 
 »to«it'as hefcn-e, and immediately endeavor to catch on 
 the**grouiid some intermediate 'pointy by which to 
 give steadiness' to his maiAch on the point\>f dirl^ction. 
 
 163. TEerc being no prominent object to serve as 
 the point of ^ir^ctlon,* tht- dT)l<fnel will dispatch the 
 lieutenant c^ionek or adjutant to^placc himself fi)rty 
 paces in advance, facing the column, and by a sign of 
 the sword establish him ^n ttie direction he may wdSh 
 to gh'C to the l^idingguide ; thilit ofiicer being thus 
 placed, this guide \^^l,tilke him as tLe»poinli of direc- 
 ticm, conii)rming himself t(> what is prescribed in the 
 schooL<ifthe company No. 87. 
 
 •164. Th^se dispositJMi\s being nwde* the colonel 
 will command : ■..'•. 
 
 1. Column foricard. 2. Guide left (or right). 3. 
 March (or double quick — March, j 
 
 165. At tlie command 'marcJi, briskly repeated by 
 the chiefs of subdivision, the column .will put itself in 
 march, conforming to what ispre^cr^bed in the sciiool 
 <;f the company No: 200 and following. 
 
 166. Xhe leading guide may always .maintain him- 
 self correctly on the diVection by keeping steadily in 
 view the two points indicated to him, or chosen by 
 
J£^ 
 
 H^i 
 
 Fi# 
 
 «H^ 
 
 '^' 
 
 
 _ F 
 
 M 
 
 J- 
 
 ■ 
 
 .4 
 
 p 
 
 
 4 
 
 _ _H 
 
 
 1 !-■ 
 
 
 1 1-^ 
 
 
 1 ^ 
 
 
 %- 
 
 P 
 
 Fie? 
 
 i- 
 
 cr— — — p 
 
 pje.5 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART IIL 39 
 
 liimsolf; if these points have a certain elevatioji, he 
 may btMis-^ui-^'d he is on tlie.true diret;tiou, when the 
 nearer masks the more distant point 
 
 167. The following. guided will preservje wnth-ex- 
 actness both step and distiiyce ; each will marcli rn . 
 the trace of the guide who inuiiediately precedes 
 him, without ocoupying himself with the general di- 
 rection. 
 
 168. Tiie lieutenant colonel' will hold himself, ha- 
 bitually, abreast with the leading'guide, to see that 
 he does not dt^viate from the direction, and'will ob- 
 serve, also, that the next guide marcjies exactly in 
 the trace of the -first. 
 
 169. The major will geoiirally be abreast with the 
 last subdivision ; he'wiii se^ that each.giiide marchrcs 
 exactly in the trace i*f the one imiuediately preccd 
 iug ; if eilhei; deviate from the directionj.ihe majoi- 
 will pronjptly rectify the error, and prevent its being 
 propagated; but he need yot interfere, in this way, 
 unless the deviation has become sensible, or iliaterial. 
 
 170. The column being rn ^uarch, the colonel will* 
 frequently cause the abovi tD be executed while 
 marching; to this elfect, he will commantl : 
 
 1. Battalion, right about. 2' March. 3. Guide 
 
 right. 
 
 171. At the r<econd command, the companies will 
 face to the riglit about, and the column will then 
 march lorvvard in an opposite <iii;ection; the chiefs of 
 subdivision will remain behind the front rank, the file 
 
40 SCnOOI> OF THE BATTALION— PAR g; III. 
 
 -closer's in front of the rear rank, -.{nCi the mtides will 
 place themselves in the s;inie rank. Tj^e lit*tttenant 
 Qolouel will remain abreast of the first division, now^ 
 in rear; the major will j,'ive a point of direction to 
 tha'4eading.guide, and ma'reh abreast of him. 
 
 172. The colonel' will hold himself habitually on 
 the directing flank; he will look to the step and to 
 the distances, and see that all the principles prescrib- 
 ed'for the march in column, school of the company, 
 are observed. 
 
 - 173. These -means, wljich the practice in that 
 school ought to have rendered familiar, will give suf- 
 ficient exactness to the direction of the column, and 
 also enable it to form/orec'«r^ ov faced the rear, on the 
 right, or on thcleft, into Ime of battle, and to close in 
 mass. 
 
 174. Biit w^hen'a cohimn, arriving in front, or in 
 rear of the line of battle, or, rathei", on one of the 
 ex-tremities of that line, lias to prtdong its(.df on it, in 
 oi'der to_formJo the left or to the rigJit into line of bat- 
 tle, then, as it is essential, to prevent the column 
 from cutting the line, or sensibly deviating from it, 
 other meanS. as follovvs, will be employed. 
 
 The column arrivincr hi front of the line of battle, to 
 prolong it on this line. 
 
 175. If the cohimn right in front aiwi^'o in front of 
 the line of battle, as it should cross it' and find itself 
 four paces beyond it after having cliang<'d dii-ection, 
 the colonel will cause to be placed, in advance, a 
 marker on the line Jo^ndicate the point at wjiich the 
 
SCHOOL Qi* THE BATTALION— PART Hi. 41 
 
 column oughtto cross it, and another marker to indi- 
 cate the point where^the first subdivision should com- 
 mence to wheel ; • he'will be so placed that when the 
 wh 'el is executed, tlir? left guide will find-himself four 
 puces vVitiiin the liue of .battle. The chief of the. 
 leading subdivision, when tRe head of the column 
 shall have arrived ne.u' the. lin^, Will take the'girtde 
 to the right, and this guide -will imineJi;H;ely direct 
 himself on the second marfiLer. On arijting abreast 
 of him, this subdivisidn will be wheeled to the lelt, 
 and when the wheel is completed, the guide will be 
 changed again to the left; tliis guide will then march 
 parallel to the line of battle by the means to be here- 
 inafter indicated. 
 
 176. The instant the fii;st subdivision v^dieels, the 
 right general guide, w'ho, by a caution from the lieu- 
 tenant colonel, -Avill before have placed himself on tRe 
 line of battle at the p(»int where the column crosses 
 it, :ni(l who will have facPd to the 'two points of di- 
 rection in his front, indicated by the C(donel, will 
 march forward" correctly on the prolongation of those 
 points. 
 
 177.^ The colnr-bearer will place himself in like 
 manne'r on the line of battle-f and, at £he instant the 
 color subdivision wheels, he will prolong his march 
 on that line, abreast with this subdivision, taking care 
 to carry the color-lance before the centre of his per- 
 son, and to maintain himself exactly in the direction 
 of the gene'ral guide who precedes him, and the point 
 of direction in front which will have been indicated 
 to him. 
 
 17^.,Fhially, tFie left general guide will pliice him- 
 self in the same maimer on the line of battle; and, 
 
42 SCHOOL OF THE P,ATTALT(5N^^PART III. 
 
 at the instant the last subdiTisicm of the battalion 
 ^viie<'^s, lie will" jiiarch correctly in the direction of 
 the color-bearer, and the other general guide. 
 
 ■ ]7?). The guide of "tliQ.fii'Bt subdivision \Vill inarch 
 steadily abre.tt-i. witii the ri"ht *geniM-al guide, and 
 about foilr^ pjices to his^wghf ; cac^h of the guides of 
 thefoll<»-\vi*ig*subdivisions will iliaVch in the trace of 
 the guide -A^o inimedia'tely pa*ecedes him, as pre- 
 scribed, No. 167. 
 
 180. The colonef, placed outside oC the general 
 •guicTes, will see tbat the coluuiu marches nearly par- 
 allel to, aud tibout four paces witkin tliese guides. 
 
 181. The lieutenant colonel and major will look to 
 the direction of fbe general gufdes,.atid to this end, 
 place themselves sometiaiies in rear of the color-bear- 
 er, or the left general gufde. 
 
 482. If the column be composed ot several battal- 
 ions, the general guides of each \\ill successively 
 plaCe themselves. on the line of battle to ])r(»lt»iig their 
 march on this lin<;', u^ ^he leading subdivision, thiit of 
 the color, and. the one in the rear of their bnttalion, 
 stall wheel into the ne\f* direction; these guides will 
 corrform tiiemselvcs respectively, as will algothe colo- 
 nel, lieutenant colonel, and ni;ij<»r, to what is pve- 
 sci'ibed abitve for thosv". of the leading battalion. 
 
 183. In the case of several Ijjittajions, the" lieuten- 
 ant cohinel of each will maintain steadily the guide 
 of his leadi)ig subdi\usion about four paces within the 
 line of geTieral guides, even should the last subdivi- 
 sions of the battalion immediately preceding deviate 
 from the' parallelism, in order that the false direction 
 
SCHOOL OF THjG; battalion— part IIL 43 
 
 of one battfJiou may not iiiflueKce that of the battal- 
 ions which follow. • • • 
 
 The column arriving behind the line of battle, to pro- 
 long it on this line. 
 
 184. If the column, right in front, arrive bejiind 
 the line of hitttlo, as it ought to find itself foui»paces 
 within this line? aftev l^avlng^changed direction, the 
 col(»nel will cawse a markei* to be pla(;ed at the point 
 where, according to that condition, t'le first subdivi- 
 sion ought to conmience ^yh6eling. Another marker 
 will be estn-blisli^d on' the line ot^* battle, ^o indicate 
 the point at which the ^^neral guides ougiit. in siye- 
 cession to begin to pndong theiiisel\*es on .tlutf line.; 
 he will be so placed -thatuCSc*^ subdivi^ijui, having 
 finished its wh^el, may find itself nearly in a liue 
 with this marker. • . * 
 
 185. At the instalit the first subdivision, gfter hav- 
 ing wheeled t<» 'the right,- begins to grolong itself, 
 parnllelly to* the line of brittle, the leading general 
 guide, phiq^d in ad^^ance on that line, will direct him- 
 self on the two points tnken in "his front; the colyr- 
 bearej-and the "otl^' general guide will successively 
 place themselves on tl?e same ^line the instant that 
 their rcf^lJeetivc subdivision* shal| have finished their 
 wheel. ' . ' 
 
 186. If the coluTOn be .composed of several biit- 
 talions, tlie genei;;il guides.of the follmviu'/ battalions 
 win successively execute what has been just pre- 
 scribed for {hose of the leading battalion, and the 
 whole will conform themselves, as well as the guides 
 of subdivisions, and the field officers of the several 
 
44 SCHOOL OF TEIE BATTALION— PART TIL 
 
 battalions, to what is indicated, above, foi- a column 
 arriving, in front of a line of battle.* 
 
 . 187. In a column, left in front^ arriving in front or 
 in rear of the line of battle,. these movements will be 
 executed on the same principles, and by inverse 
 means. 
 
 The column arriving o^ the rjght or fiie left of the line 
 of battle, to prolong it on- this line. 
 
 ■ 188, If the:oolmpin, iustfead* of .jrrriviBg in front or 
 in rear orthe line of battler, fi rrive on its 'right or left, 
 aftd ff it liave t« prolong itself on Ihat line, in order 
 afterwards to form to 'the left or right into line of 
 battle, the colonel will Bring the color and general 
 giiides' on th'e fla^ik of the colunni by the ct)mmaud 
 color and- general guides on the Una;, and these guides 
 will proking themselves on the •line of battle, con- 
 forming to wtat is prescribed above: 
 
 ■Manner of prolonging a line -of battle by^narkers. 
 
 189. When a column prolongs ftself on the line of 
 battle, it being all-importyint that the general guides 
 march correctly-on that line, it becomes necessary 
 that colonels, lieutenant colonels, and niajors, whose 
 duty it is to maintain the. true direction, should be 
 able to see, as f^ir as practicable, the two objects, on 
 which the march of the general guides ought to»be 
 directed; consequently, when no pronnnenf objects 
 present themselves in the desired direction, the chief 
 of the column will supply the want of them in ad- 
 
SCHOOfa.OF TiJE BATTALION— PART. III. 4ij 
 
 vance by aidAie-camp, or othfr mounted officers, and 
 in such number 'asiiiay be necessaiy. * 
 
 190. Three such officers may prolong a line as far 
 as may be desired in. the following nijgijer : they 
 will place themselves rn *advance,on the-line of-b'at- 
 tle, the first at the point where the head of the 
 column ought to enter ; the secynd, three or fou^- hun- 
 dred paces behind tlieiirst^^and tlTe'thiiiJ, arlffce dis- 
 tance behind the second. The first of the'se officers 
 will remain in position*till the leacliug gtuj^fal- guide 
 shall have enleted on the linfet)f battle,- and then, at 
 a gallop, place himself jat a ^nvenient^ distance be- 
 hind the third. Tl?e second will do tlR>- like in re- 
 spe'ct to the first, -when the iTead of tlte^Qolumn.stali 
 be near him,*nd eo oif in c^tntmualion. TK-ese ufticej^s, 
 without dism('UiUi/ig, will face to the column, and 
 cover each otl^er accuriitely. in file. It will be on 
 thein that th^ general^ljides\yill steadily 'direct their 
 march, and it will be so much the more easy for the 
 latter to maintain themselves on the direction, as 
 they will alv^ays be able to syd ^e- mounted" officers 
 over ttj% heads of tBe prepe^ing guidejs ; th'tis the de- 
 viation from fh^-directri:)n,,by oTiC oi-more general 
 guides, need not mislead tiiose who follow. 
 
 191. A single mounted -officer may saffice to assure 
 the dii*ection't)f ft column, wLen the point of direc- 
 tion towards wliich it marbhes is very distinct. In 
 this ortfie, that officer will place himself on the line of 
 battle within thfit point, and beyond the one at which 
 the h'ipad of the column will halt, and remain in posi- 
 tion till the column halts ; serving thus as the intei'- 
 mediate point for giving sten^iness to the march of 
 the geucra-Lguides. 
 
16 SCHOOL OF. THE BATTAIJitK-PAllT HI. 
 
 192. For^a column oi^ne o^ two b^itl^lions, mark- 
 ers on foot will siffirc^^ to indujate the line to be fol- 
 lowed by the general guides. 
 
 M£i^arks on the mliroii ift column. 
 
 l9:>%AltliGu^h« ttie'uncftdenced step be that of 
 columns in* piTiite marched, and ulso.tjjat which ought 
 to be h<U)itmilly__ employed, in* the Evolutions of the 
 Line, bec!!jise itleavaa- the men'raore at ease, and, 
 consequoiitly, is better-adapted to movements on a 
 large scale a^ijl to difficTllt grounds, neve;.-theless, as 
 i^this^of panun^ttnt impoistance*to confirm- soldiers- in 
 the measureTand tbe^nijovement «f the ca'jenced pace, 
 i\x& route step will be but" little practiced in the ex- 
 ercises by battalion, except in gLjiiTg to,- and return- 
 ing from, the grounil of iilstrucfion, gnd.for teaclring 
 the mechanism and ihoVcmeAtS' of "columns in route. 
 
 J94. It is highly e'seentialto the'regirtarity,of the 
 march in coUumi that ea<'h gil.ide foiluw exactly in 
 the trace of thQ one immediat-ely pi-cct^ding, without 
 occupying his attention witfh the general directipu of 
 the guides. If this principle be sj;eadily observed, 
 the guides will -find theipselves aligned, provided that 
 the leading one march exactly in the direction indi- 
 cated to him-; and even should obstacles ii> his way 
 force him, into a momentary deviation, the direction 
 of the column would not necessarily be changed i 
 whereas, if the following guides endeavor to conform 
 themselves at once to all the movements of the lead- 
 ing one, in order to coVer him in- fil«^ 4uch endeavors 
 would necessarily cause correspoiKhng fluotuations 
 
j£2- 
 
 P-3i> 
 
 \\ 
 
 M A V 
 
 TT" 
 
 k=^ 
 
 1 
 
 H H ^ ^^ ^ > 
 
 ^ i^ r-r:-::3 
 
 ^ „..j^ r~— ? 
 
SCHOOL OF fl HE RATTALIf'N—rART III. 47 
 
 in the (Toiamn from ri^ht-to Jeft, and from left to 
 right, "nnd j-ender the presei'vation of distances ex- 
 tremely diffic'flt. . 
 
 * • • • ■ 
 
 105. As a congequQwce of'the.princiTfley. that <iUQh 
 
 guide s^Iuill exactly follow 'in* the trace of ' the, one 
 tcho immediately ;)?-erer/fs'i ft pending the m:irch of Ihe 
 Cdluinn, th(! eulunel ah'Sil give a new point'yf direc- 
 tion, to(» near to the first to requireTi torrnnl chiTtige 
 of direction, the >ea(fiMg guide, advancing the oue or 
 the other shoulder, will iiifmediately direct Jijms^f 
 on this point ; the other guides will only coflrorm 
 themselves to this movement as each arrives at the 
 point at which the first had execirt>'d it. Each pub- 
 division will cf)nf(U'm itself f(7 the movei!ient of its 
 guide, the me<i insa^isibly lengthening or sbortenitig 
 the sti^p, and advancing or refusing ftlV'**^^'i"S back) 
 the shoulder oppositti to the gtride. but without losing 
 the touch of the elbow towards his side. 
 
 196. The^coliimn, by compa^iy, .being in march, the 
 colonel will cause it to* diminish front by platoon, 
 from front to rear, at once, and to increase front by 
 platoon iu like manner, which movemei^ts will hh 
 commanded and executed as prescribect in .the school 
 of the company, Nos. 282 ^nd 2^3 and following, 
 changing the command /or/n company iofonfi compa- 
 nies.. So may he increase and. diminish, or diminish 
 and increase front, accordihg to the same principles 
 and at once, by company, chailging th» command 
 form companies t<» form Uiiisions^ and the command 
 break into platoons to Ijj-eak into companies. In thi.s 
 case, the compa-nies and divisions will execute what 
 
49 .SCHOOL OF TIHO'I>AVrALl©N PART HI. 
 
 is prei>cribeifi»r platoons'ahS cdtnpanies i'e«r*ectivc]y. 
 
 UiT.' The Cdlunin beiii^.at a lialt,. if the colonel 
 skonld wif?h fo march Jt\() theT4ear,,an<i the distance 
 tojbe gained he so inc<>n.sitl(ii-ableas to render a coun- 
 tewnaj;clj a disproii(»rtiouate loas of time, he will 
 cai^e the column to face^ about, and tht n put it in 
 ma1-ch by tlie commands ■prescribed No. J 64 ; the 
 chiefs pt' the subdivision^ wilf remain behind the 
 froiit -z'ank, the file ctosefs before frije rear rank, and 
 the guides, will step into the rear ran1\, now in front. 
 In a colujTin, by division, the junior captains, in the 
 intervals between' companies, will replace their cov- 
 ering sergeants in the 'rear rank, a-iid these sergeants 
 will step into the line of file close'rs in "front of their 
 intervals. » * ... 
 
 ArTICLK gECOND. 
 
 Column in route. ^ 
 
 198. A - column in route, like a column in ma- 
 noeuvrtv, ought never to have a depth greater than 
 aboutthe''fr(nit itliHcl yccupied in the line of battle, 
 Jess tlre^front of ii subdivision. 
 
 199. The observainct? of this principle requiiTs no 
 particular rule for a C(duftm in uuinceuvre ; but, as a 
 coluujn ir; 'route rui^ have hourly to "pass narrow 
 vk'ays, bridges, lor otlier d^les, rendering it necessaty 
 to diminish the frost of. subdivisions, it becomes im- 
 portant to give ruk^s ahd* means by which the column 
 may, for* any length of "march j- pi"es«ii:ve the ease of 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART III. 49 
 
 the route step v-'ithout elougatioii from front to rear. 
 
 200. A column fn route will bo habitually formed 
 by company. 
 
 201. When a column in route shall arrive at a pass 
 too narrow to receive the front of a company, the 
 column ^vill diminish front by platoon before enter- 
 ing. This movement \vHl be, executed successively, 
 or by all the companies at once. 
 
 202. If, however, the defile be very short, and it 
 may be passed by the diminution of a few files, it 
 will be preferable to break to the rear the limited 
 number of files. 
 
 203. The column being bj platoon, and the want 
 of space rendering a further diminution of front ne- 
 cessary, it -will be diminished by section, if the pla- 
 toons be of twelve or more files. 
 
 204. The column being by section, will continue to 
 march by that front as long as the'defile may permit. 
 
 205. If the platoons have less than twelve files, 
 one or two files will bo broken to the rear, according 
 to the narrowing of the defile, and the route step con- 
 tinued as long as six files can march abreast. 
 
 206. What has just been explained for breaking 
 files to the rear in a column by platoon, is equally ap- 
 plicable to a column by section. 
 
 207. If the defile be too narrow to permit six men 
 to march abreast, the subdivisions will be marched 
 successively by the flank, conforming to what is pre- 
 scribed Nos. 314 and 315, school of the company. 
 
 203. The battalion marching by the flank, will be 
 
 4* 
 
50 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART III 
 
 formed into column, by section, by .platoon, or by 
 company, as -soon as the breadth of. the way may 
 permit ; the several mcvenieiits wliieh these forma- 
 tions include will be executed by the commands of 
 the captains, as their companies successively clear 
 the defile, observing the ftdlowing rules. 
 
 209. As soon as the way is sufficiently broad to 
 contain six men abreast, the captain will command : 
 
 1. By section (or by platoon) into line. 2. March. 
 
 210. At the command march, the subdivisions indi- 
 cated will form themselves into line ; the tiles v, hich 
 have not been able to enter, will follow (by tlir tlaiik) 
 the last four files of their subdivision which have en- 
 tered into line. 
 
 211. The column marching in this order, the files 
 in rear will be caused to enter into line as the in- 
 creased breadth of the way may permit. 
 
 212. The column marching by section or by pla- 
 toon, platoons or companies will be formed as soon 
 as the breadth of the way may permit. 
 
 213. The leading subdivision will follow the wind- 
 ings of the pass or defile ; the following subdivisions 
 will not occupy themselves with the direction, but 
 all, in succession, pass over the trace of the subdi- 
 visions which precede them respectively. The men 
 will not seek to avoid the bad parts of the way, but 
 pass, as far as practicable, each in the direction of 
 his file. 
 
 214. Changes of direction will always be made 
 without command ; if the change be important, a 
 
SCHOOL OF T-HE BATTALION— PART 111. ^ 
 
 caution merely from the respective chiefs to their 
 subdivisions wiU suffice, and the rear rank, as well as 
 the tiles broken to the rear, will execute successively 
 the movement where the front j-auk had executed it. 
 
 2J5. The cohtnel will hold himself at the head of 
 the battalion ; he will regulate the step of the lead- 
 ing subdivision, and indicate* to its chief the instant 
 for executing the various movements which the na- 
 ture of the route may render necessary. 
 
 21(). If the column be composed of several bat- 
 talions, each will conform itself, in its turn, to what 
 shall have been commanded for the leading battalion, 
 observing to execute each movement at the ssCtne 
 place, and in the same manner. 
 
 217. Finally, to render the mechanism of all those 
 movements familiar to the troopis, and to habituate 
 them to march in the route step without elongating 
 the column, commanders will generally cause their bat- 
 ta4ions to march in this step, going to, and return- 
 ing from, fields of exercise. Erich will occasionally 
 conduct his battalion through narrow passes, in order 
 to make it perceive the utility of the principles pre- 
 scribed above ; and he will several times, in every 
 course of instruction, march it in the route step, and 
 cause to be executed, sometimes at once, and some- 
 times successively, the divers movements which have 
 just been indicated. 
 
6-2 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART 'III 
 
 General remarks on the CQlumn in route. 
 
 218. The lesson relative to the column in route ia, 
 by its frequent application, one of the most important, 
 that can be given to troops. If it be not well taught 
 and established on right principles, it will hapjien 
 that the rear of the column in route will be obliged 
 to run, to regain distanees, or that the front will be 
 forced to halt till the rear shall have accomplished 
 that object ; thus rendering the march greatly slower, 
 or greatly more iatiguiug, generally both, than if it 
 were executed according to rule. 
 
 219. The ordinary progress of a column in roJite 
 ought to be, on good roads or good grounds, at the 
 rate of one hundred and ten paces in a minute. This 
 rate may be easily maintained by columns of almost 
 any depth ; but over bad roadi!, ploughed fields, loose 
 sands, or mountainous districts, the progress cannot 
 be so great, and must therefore be regulated accord- 
 ing to circumstances. 
 
 220. The most certain means of marching \\c\\ in 
 route, is to preserve always a regular and eq,ual 
 morement, and, if obstacles oblige one or more sub- 
 divisions to slacken or to shorten the step, to cause 
 the primitive rate of march to be resumed the mo- 
 ment the difficulties are passed.- 
 
 221. A subdivision ought never to take more than 
 the prescribed distance from the subdivision immedi- 
 ately preceding ; but it is sometimes- necessary to les- 
 sen that distance. 
 
 222. Thus: the head of the column encounters an 
 obstacle which obliges it to relax its march ; all the 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION -PART HI. 53 
 
 following subdirisioQs will preserve the habitual step, 
 and close up in mass, if necessary, on the subdivision 
 nearest to the obstacle. Distances will afterv^-ards 
 naturally be recovered as each subdivision shall suc- 
 cessively have passed the obstacle. Nevertheless, if 
 the difficulty be too great to be overcome by one sub- 
 division, whilst the next is closing up, so that dis- 
 tances cannot afterwards be recovered without run- 
 ning, the chief of the column will halt the leading 
 subdivision beyond the obstacle, at a distance suffi- 
 cient to contain the whole column in mass. He will 
 then put the column in march, the subdivisions taking 
 distances by the head, observing to GOmmence the 
 movement in time, so that the last subdivision may 
 not be obliged to halt, after having cleared the ob- 
 stacle. 
 
 223. ^yhcn the chief of a column shall wish to 
 change the rate of march, he Will cause the leading 
 battalion to quicken ov to relax the step insensibly, 
 nnd send orders to the other battalions* each to regu- 
 late itself by that which precedes it. 
 
 224. The column being ccynposed of several bat- 
 talions, the general-in-chief will always leave an aid- 
 de-camp with its rear to bring him prompt Informa- 
 tion if it find a difficulty in following. 
 
 ■ 225. Subdivisions (»ught always to step out well in 
 obli(piing, both in breaking and forming companies or 
 platoons. When either is done in succession, it is 
 highly important that no subdivision slacken or shorten 
 the step, whilst that which precedes it is engaged in 
 the movement. The observstnee of this principle can 
 alone prevent an elongation of the column. 
 
 22G. If the battalion, marching by the flank, en- 
 
54 SCHOOL OF THE- BATTALION- PART III. 
 
 counter a pass so narrow a« to oblige it to defile with 
 a front of two men, the c^lonel will order snpport 
 arms, t;ike the cadeuced step, and nndouble the files, 
 which willJje executed as prescribed in the school of 
 company, ■l5'o. 3*26 ; the files will double again as soon 
 as the breadth of the way will permit. 
 
 227. If the defile be only sufficient to receive a 
 front of one man, the colonel will cause the men to 
 pass one at a time. The men of the same file should 
 follow each other in their order as closely as possible, 
 and without loss of time. As soon as the defile per- 
 mits a front of* two or /our men, the battalion will be 
 reformed into two or four ranks, and will march in 
 tills order until there bo space to form platoons or 
 sections, as indicated No. 2U9. 
 
 228. In bot'h cases, ju«t suppoised, the head of the 
 battlion, after having passed the defile, will march 
 till sufficient* space be left to contain the whole of the 
 subdivisions in mass; afterwards it wilt- be put in 
 march by the means indicated No. 222. 
 
 229. When a m)mmand has to move rapidly oyer a 
 given distance, the movements prescribed in this 
 article will be executed in double quick time ; if the 
 distance be long, the chief of the column will uot 
 allow the march at this gait to be continued for more 
 than fifteen minutes ; at the end of this time, he will 
 order the ordinary route step to be marched for five 
 minutes, and then again resume the double quick. If 
 the ground be uneven, having considerable ascents 
 and descents, he will reserve the double quick for 
 those parts of the ground most favorable to this 
 march. 
 
1. 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 -i- 
 
 ■'%^ • 
 
 1 i 
 
 .k ,• ^ 
 
 1 1 
 
 ^^ ^!:,!ii;',:iBftiSf 
 
 i 
 
 
 . . S3ii,«i:.ffiiii^' 
 
 
 '■ -iii?:;';ii'';3;;ii^ 
 
 
 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART IIL 55 
 
 230. A column marchiiio: alternately in double 
 quick time and tlie ordinary route step, in the iTian- 
 uer stated j can easily accomplish very long dis- 
 tances in a very short space of time ; but when tiie 
 distance to be passed over be not greater than two 
 miles, it ought to be accomplished, when the ground 
 is favorable, without changing the rate of inarch. 
 
 Article Third, 
 
 To change direction in column at full distance. 
 
 231. The column being in march in the cadenced- 
 step, when the colonel shall wish to cause it to change 
 direction, he will go to the point at which the change 
 ought to be commenced, and establish a marker 
 there, presentiug the breast to the flank of the col- 
 umn ; tbis marker, no matter to which side the 
 change of direction's to b^ made, will be posted on 
 the opposite side, and he Wnll remain in posititm till 
 the last subdivision of the battalion shall have passed 
 The leading subdivision b^ing within a few paces of 
 the marker, the colonel will command : 
 
 Head of column to the left (or right.) 
 
 232. At this, the chief of the leading subdivision 
 will immediate4y take the guide on the side opposite 
 the change of direction, if not already there. This 
 guide will direct himself so as to graze the breast of 
 the marker ; arrived at this point the chief will cause 
 his subdivision to change direction by the commands 
 
56 SCHOOL <.'F THE EATTALIO.N— PART III. 
 
 and according ito the piinciples prescribed in the 
 schoM of the company. When the wheel is com- 
 pletod, the cliief of this subdivision will retake the 
 guide, if changed, on the side of the primitive di- 
 rection. 
 
 233. The chief of eajch succeeding subdivision, as 
 well as the guides, will contorm to what has just 
 been explained for the leading subdivision. 
 
 • 234, The colonel will carefully see that the guide 
 of each subdivision, in wheeling, does not throw him- 
 self without or within, but passes overall the points 
 of the arc of the circle, which ho ought to describe. 
 
 235. As often as no distinct object presents itself 
 in the new direction, the lieutenant colonel will place 
 himself upon it in advance, at the distance of thirty 
 or forty paces from the markei-, and be assured in 
 this direction by the colonel ; tlie leading guide will 
 take, the moment he shall have .changed direction, 
 two points on the ground in the straight line which, 
 drawn from himself, would pass between the heels of 
 the lieutenant colonel, taking, afterwards, new points 
 as he advances. 
 
 236, The major will see that the guides direc, 
 themselves on the marker posted at the point o 
 change, so as to graze his breast. 
 
 237.- If the column be composed of several battal- 
 ions, the lieutenant colonel of the second, will cause 
 the marker of the first battali<ui, to be replaced as 
 soon as the last subdivision of this battalion shall 
 have passed ; this disposition will be observed by bat- 
 talion after battalion, to the rear of the column. 
 
SCHOOL OD THE BATTALP N— PART HI. 57 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 238. It has been demonstrated, school of the com- 
 pany, how important it is, first, that each subdivision 
 execute its chant^e of direction precisely at tlie point 
 where the leading one had changed, and that it ar- 
 rive in a square with the direction ; second, that the 
 wheeling point ought, always, to be cleared in time, 
 in order that the subdivision engaged in the wheel may 
 not arrest the movement of the following one.' The 
 deeper the column, the more rigorously ought these 
 principles to be observed ; because a lault that would 
 be but slight in a column of a single battalion, would 
 cause much embarrassment in one of great depth. 
 
 Article Fourth. 
 
 To halt the column. 
 
 230. The column being in march, when the coloue 
 shall wish to halt it, he will command : 
 
 1. Column. 2. Halt. 
 
 240. At th-^ second command, briskly repeated by 
 the captains, the column willhalt ; no guide will stir, 
 th(mgh he may have lost his distance, or be out of the 
 direction of the preceding guides. 
 
 241. The column being in march, in doublfi quick 
 time, will be halted by the same commands. At the 
 
53 SCflOOL OF THE BATTALIQN— PART IH. 
 
 conuiifiml halt, the men will hylt in their places, and 
 will themselves rectify their positions in the ranks. 
 
 242, The column being halted, when the colonel 
 shall wish to form it into line of battle, he will move 
 a little in front of the letuliui,^ guide, and face to him ; 
 this guide and the following one will fix their eyes on 
 the colonel, iu order promptly to conform themselves 
 to his directions. 
 
 343. If the colonel judge it not necessary to give a 
 general direction to the guides, he will limit himself 
 to rectifying the position of such as may be without, 
 or within the direction, by the command guide of 
 (such) company, or guides of (such) companies, to 
 the right, for to the left ; ) at this command, the guides 
 designated will place theuiselves on the direction ; 
 the others will stand fast. 
 
 244. If, on the contrary, the colonel judge it ne- 
 cessary to give a general direction to the guides of the 
 column, he will place the first two on the direction 
 he shall have chosen, and conmiaud : 
 
 Guides cover. 
 
 245, At this, the following guides will promptly 
 place themselves on the direction covering the first 
 two in file; and each precisely at a distance equal to 
 the front of his company, from the guide immedi- 
 ately preceding ; the litmtenant 'colonel will assure 
 them in the direction, and the colonel will command : 
 
 9 
 
 Left (or right)— Dress. 
 
SCH^'OL OF THE BATTALION -PART Jll. 59 
 
 240, At this command, each company will incline 
 to the right or left, and dress fonvai-d or backward, 
 so as to bring the desigm^ted flank to rest on its 
 guide; each captain wilT place himself two paces 
 outside of his guide, promptly align his company 
 parallelly with that w^hich precedes, then coujuiand 
 Front, and return to his phice in column. 
 
 247. Finally, if the general guides march on the 
 flank of the column, the colonel, having halted it, 
 will place himself in rear of the color-bearer, to as- 
 certain whether the leading general guide and the 
 color-bearer be exactly on the direction of the two 
 points in advance, and establish them on that direc- 
 tion if they Joe not already qn it ; the major will do 
 the like, in respect to the general guide in the rear ; 
 which being executed, the colonel will command : 
 
 1. Gmm/cs— On THF, LINIE. 
 
 248. At this command the guide of each company 
 of the directing flank will step promptly into the 
 direction of the general guides, and face to the front. 
 The lieutenant colonel, placed in fi-ont of, and facing 
 to, the leading general guides, and the major, placed 
 in rear or the rearmost niue, will promptly align the 
 company guides. 
 
 240. The colonel, having verified the direction of 
 the guides, will command : 
 
 Left (or ripjit) — Dress. 
 
 250, This will be executed as prescribed, No. 246. 
 
60 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART Ul 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 251. The means indicated, No. 244, and f(ill(»wing, 
 for giving a general direction to the guides of a col- 
 umn, at full distance, Avill apply onl}' to a column 
 composed of two, or at most, three battalions. If 
 the number be more numerous, its chief will cause 
 the colors and general guides of all the battalions to 
 step out and place themselves on the direction which 
 he may wish to give to the column, as is explained in 
 the evolutions of the line. 
 
 Article Fifth. 
 To dose the column to half distance, or in mass. 
 
 252. A column by company being at full distance 
 rigl)t in front, and at a halt, when the colonel shall 
 wish to cause it to close to half distance, on the lead- 
 ing company, he will command : 
 
 1. To half distance, close column. 2. MARCH (or 
 
 double quick — March.) 
 
 253. At the fi;-st commaiid, the captain of the 
 leading company will caution it to stand fast. 
 
 554. At the command march, which will be re- 
 peated by all the captains, except the captain of the 
 leading company, this company will stand fast, and 
 its chief will align it by the left ; the file closers will 
 close one pace upon the rear rank. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART III. 61 
 
 255. All the other compan'es will continue to 
 mfirch, and as each in succession arrives at platoon 
 distance from the one which precedes, its captain will 
 halt it. 
 
 256. At .the instant that each company halts, its 
 guide will place himself on the direction of the guides 
 who precede, and the captain will align the company 
 by the left; the file closers will close one pace upon 
 the rear rank. 
 
 257. No particular attention need be given to the 
 general direction of the guides before they respec- 
 tively halt ; it will suffice if each follow in the trace 
 of the oue who precedes him. 
 
 258. The colonel on the side of the guides, will su- 
 perintend the execution of the movement, observing 
 that the captains halt their companies exactly at pla- 
 toon distance the one from the other. 
 
 259. The lieutenant colonel, a few paces in front, 
 will foce to the leading guide and assure the posi- 
 tions of the following guides as they successively 
 place themselves on the direction. 
 
 260. The major will follow the movement abreast 
 with the inst guide. 
 
 261. If the column be in uiareh, the colone4 will 
 cause it to close by tfie same commands. 
 
 262 If the column be marching in double quick 
 time, at the first command, the captain of the lead- 
 ing C(»mpany will command quick time; the chiefs of 
 the other companies will caution them to continue 
 their march. 
 
 263. At the command marc/«, the leading company 
 will march in quiet, and the other companies in 
 double quick time ; and as each arrives at platoon 
 
62 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART HI. 
 
 distance from the preceding one, its chief will cause 
 it to marcii in quick time, 
 
 2G4. When the rearmost company shall have gain- 
 ed its distance, the colonel will command : 
 
 Double quick — March. 
 
 265. When the colonel shall wish to halt the column 
 and to cause it to close to half distance at the same 
 tiine^he will notify the captain of the leading com- 
 pany of his intention, who at the command ?)<«rc/i, will 
 halt his company and align it by the left. 
 
 266. If the column be marching in quick time, and 
 the col(»nel should not give the command double 
 quick, the captain of the leading -company will halt 
 his company at the command march, and align it by 
 the left. In the case, where the colonel adds the 
 command double quick, the captains of companies will 
 conform to what is prescribed No. 262, and the move- 
 ment will be executed as indicated No. 263. 
 
 To close the column on the eighth, or rearmost 
 
 company. 
 « 
 
 267. The column being at a halt, if instead of caus- 
 ing it to close to half distance on the first company, 
 the colonel should wish to cause it to close on the 
 eighth, he will command : 
 
 1. On the eighth company, to half distance close column. 
 2. Battalion about— FACE. 3. Golumn forward. 
 4. Guide right. 5. Maii€H for double quick — 
 March.) 
 
6£_ 
 
 MnuiiiyniiiiiiHinillIp 
 HiiiliMliilliH 
 
 niii!iiiiiii!( ' i; i j! i i i ii in «p 
 
 MP!!i;ilH li|ir!lillllHIP 
 M;!"aHtl:".i"!MIM!M 
 
 H P 
 
 
 U P 
 
 ■ ;- 
 
 ^_.. 
 
 
 H 
 
 i 
 
 q " 
 
 
 M 
 
 i 
 
 M. 
 
 
 K 
 
 
 'i 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 q-- 
 
 
 JJ 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 H 
 
 HTz: 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART HL 63 
 
 268. At the second commancl, all the companies ex- 
 cept the eighth, will face about, and- their guides %yill 
 remain in the front rank, now the rear. 
 
 269. At the fourth command, all the captains will 
 place themselves two paces outside of their com- 
 panies on the directing flank. 
 
 270. At the command march, the eighth company 
 will stand fast, and its cai)tain will align it by the 
 left, the (»ther companies will put theinselv.es in 
 march, and, as each arrives at platoon distance from 
 the one established before it, its captain will halt it 
 and face it to the front. At the moment that each 
 company halts, the left guide, remaining faced to the 
 rear, will place himself promptly on the direction of 
 the guides already established. Immediately after 
 the captain will align his company by the left, and 
 the file closers will close one pace on the rear rank. 
 If this movement be executed in double quick time, 
 each captain, in turn, will halt, and command: Such 
 company, right about — Halt. At this command, the 
 company designated will face to the right about and 
 halt. 
 
 271. All the companies being aligned, the colonel 
 will cause the guides, who stand faced to the rear, 
 to face about. 
 
 272. The lieutenant colonel, placing himself behind 
 the rearmost guide, will assure successively the posi- 
 tions of the other guides, as prescribed No. 259 ; the 
 major will remain abreast with the rearmost com- 
 pany. 
 
 273. The column being in march, when the colonel 
 shall wish to close it on the eighth company, he will 
 command : 
 
64 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION- PART HI. 
 
 1. On the eighth company, to half distance, close column. 
 2. Battalion right about. 3. MARCH (or double 
 quick — Makch.) 4. Guide right. 
 
 274. At the first command, the captain of the 
 eighth comically will caution his company that it will 
 remain faced to the front; the captains of the other 
 companies will caution their companies that they 
 will have to face about. 
 
 275. At the command march, the captain of the 
 eighth company will halt his company and align it by 
 the left; the file closers will clo!>e one pace upon the 
 rear rank. 
 
 276. The captains of the other companies, at the 
 same cenunand, will place themselves on the tlank of 
 the column ; the subdivisions will face about, and as 
 each arrives at platoon distance from the company 
 immediately preceding it, its chief will face it to the 
 front and halt it as prescribed No. 270, The instant 
 each company halts, the guide t»n the directing flank, 
 remaining faced to the rear, will quickly place him- 
 self on the direction of the guides already established. 
 After which, the captain will align the company by 
 the left, and the file closers will close one pace upon 
 the rear rank. 
 
 277. The lieutenant colonel will follow the move- 
 ment abreast of the first company. The njajor will 
 place himself a few paces in rear of the guide of 
 the eighth company, and will assure successively the 
 puisilion of the other guides. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART IIL 65 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 278. A column by division at -full distance will close 
 to half distance by the same menns and the same 
 commands. 
 
 279. A column by company, or by division, being 
 at full or half distance, the. colonel will cause it to 
 close in inass by the same means and command's, sitb- 
 stitutiug the indication column, close in 7nass, fOr 
 that of to half distance, close column. Each chief of 
 subdivision will conform himself to all that has just 
 been prescribed, except that he will not halt his sub- 
 division till its guide shall be at a distance of six 
 paces from the guide of the subdivision next preced- 
 ing. 
 
 280. In a column, left in fnmt, these various move- 
 ments will be executed, on the same principles. 
 
 Article Sixth. 
 
 To march in column at half distance, or closed in mass. 
 
 281. A column at half distance or in mass, being 
 at a halt, the colonel will put it in march by the com- 
 mands prescribed for a column at full distance. 
 
 282.. The means cf direction will also be the same 
 for a column at half distance or in mass, as fyr a col- 
 un.n at full distance, except that the general guides 
 ■will not step out. 
 
 28-^. A column at half distance or in mass, being 
 in march, when the colonel shall wish to halt it, he 
 5* 
 
66 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART IH. 
 
 will give the couiinands prescribed for halting a. col- 
 umn at full distance, and if, afterwards, he judge it 
 necessary to give a general direction to the guides of 
 the column, he will en)ijlov, to this end, the com- 
 mands and means indicated, No. 244 and following. 
 
 284. In columns at half distance or closed in mass, 
 chiefs of subdivisions will repeat the commands warcA, 
 and halt, as in columns at full distance. 
 
 285. The colonel will often march the column to 
 the rear, by the means and commands prescribed 
 Nos. 170 and 171.. 
 
 286. A column by division or company, w^hether at 
 full or half distance or closed in mass, at a halt or 
 marching, can be faced to the right or left, and march- 
 ed off in the new direction. 
 
 Article Seventh. 
 
 To change direction in column at half distance. 
 
 287. A column at half distance, being in march, 
 will change direction by the same commands and ac- 
 cording to the same principles as a column at full dis- 
 tance; but as the distance between the subdivisions 
 is less, the pivot man in each subdivision will take 
 steps of fourteen inches instead of nine, and of seven- 
 teen inches instead of eleven, according to the gait, 
 in order to clear, in time, the wheeling point, and the 
 marching flank will describe the arc of a larger cir- 
 cle, the better to facilitate the movement. 
 
J£. 
 
 j'jy- 
 
 
 i 
 
 ^ 
 
 y 
 
 ^ 
 
 H 
 
 
 H Y 
 
^4 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 , y. ,. 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 -: 
 
 .■-. 
 
 ._ __P 
 
 
 T 
 
 'H 
 
 V- 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART III. 67 
 
 Article EicnTiL 
 
 To change^ direction in column closed in mass. 
 1st. To change direction in marching. 
 
 288. A cohimn by divisiou, closed in mass, being in 
 march, will change direction by the front of subdivi- 
 sions. 
 
 289. Whether the change be made to the reverse, 
 or to the pivot flank, it will always be executed on 
 the principles of wheeling in mnrchiug; to this end, 
 the colonel will first cause the battalion to'take the 
 guide on the flank opposite to the intended change of 
 direction, if it be not already on that flank. 
 
 290. A column by division, closed in mass, right in 
 front, having to change direction to the right, the 
 colonel, after having caused a marker to be placed at 
 the point where the change ought to commence, will 
 command : 
 
 1. Battalion, right wheel. 2. MARCH. 
 
 291. At the command march, the leading division 
 will wheel as if it were part of a column at half 
 distance. 
 
 292. The instant that this division commences the 
 wheel, all the others will, at once, conform them- 
 selves to its movement; to this end the left giiide of 
 each, advancing slightly the left shoulder and length- 
 ening a little the step, will incline to the left, and will 
 
68 SCHOOL OF TPIE BATTALION— PART III. 
 
 observe, at the same time^to gain so much ground to 
 the front that there may constantly be an interval of 
 four paces between his division and that which pro- 
 ceeds it; and as soon as he yluill cover the preceding 
 guide, he will cease to incline and then march exactly 
 in his trace. 
 
 293. Each division will conform itself to the move- 
 ment of its guide ; the men will feel lightly the elbow 
 towards him and advance a little th« left shoulder the 
 instant the movement common-ces; each file in inclin- 
 ing, wall gain so much the less ground to the front, 
 as the file shall be nearer to the pivot, and the right 
 guide will gain only so much as may be necessaiy to 
 maintain between his own and the preceding division 
 the same distance which separates their marching 
 flanks. 
 
 294. Each chief of division, turning to it, will regu- 
 late its march, and see that it remains constantly in- 
 cluded between its guides, that its alignment con- 
 tinues nearly parallel tothat of the preceding division, 
 and that the centre bends only a little to the rear. 
 
 295. The colonel will superintend the movement, 
 and cause the pivot of the leading division to length- 
 en or to shorten the step, conforming to the principle 
 established, school of the company, No. 227— if either 
 be necessary to facilitate tlie movement of the other 
 divisions. 
 
 296. The lieutenant colonel, placed near the left 
 guide of the leading division, will regulate his march. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART HI. GO 
 
 and take care, above all, that he does not throw him- 
 self icithin the arc he oug-ht to describe. 
 
 297. The. major, placed in the rear of the guides' 
 will see that the last three conform themselves, each, 
 by slight degrees,^to the movement of the guide im- 
 mediately preceding, and that neither inclines too 
 much in the endeavor to cover too promptly the guide 
 in his front; he will rectify any serious fault that may 
 be committed in either of those particulars. 
 
 298. The colouelj seeing the wheel nearly ended, 
 will command : ' 
 
 1. Fonca'rd. 2. March. 
 
 299. At the second command, which will be given 
 at the instant tlie leading division completes its wheel, 
 it will resume the direct march ; the other divisions 
 will conform themselves to this movement; and if 
 any guide find himself not covering his immediate 
 leader, he will, by slight degrees, bring himself on the 
 trace of that guide, by advancing the right shoulder, 
 
 300. If the column, right in front, has to change 
 direction k) the left, the colonel will first cause it to 
 take the guide to the right, and then command: 
 
 1. Battalion, left icliccl. 2, March. 
 
 301,* At the c(»mm^nd 7>?<?rf/t, the battalion will 
 change directi(»n to the left, according to the princi- 
 ples just prescribed, and by inverse means, 
 
 302. When the battalion shall have resumed the 
 
70 SCHOOL- OF THE BATTAL10N-J.^ART JH. 
 
 direct mfirch, the colonel will change the guide to the 
 left, on seeing the last three guides nearly in the di- 
 rection of the one in front.- 
 
 303. The foregoing changes of direction will be 
 executed according to the same principles in a col- 
 umn, left in front. 
 
 304. A column by company, closed in mass, will 
 phange direction, in marching, by the commands and 
 meaiis indicated for a column by division. 
 
 305. The guide who is the pivot of the particular 
 w^heel,. ought to maintain himself at his usual distance 
 of six prices from the guide who precedes him; if this 
 distance be not exactly preserved, the divisions would 
 necessarily becouie confounded, which must be care- 
 fully avoided. 
 
 2d. To change direction from a halt. 
 
 306. A'column by company, or by division, closed 
 in mass, being at a halt, when the colonel shall wish 
 to give it a new dii-ection, and in which it is to re- 
 main, he will caus^ it to execute this movement by 
 the flanks of subdivisions, in the following.manner; 
 
 ■ 307. The battalion having the right in front, when 
 the colonel shall wish t^ cause it to change direction 
 by the right flank, he wi'l indicate to the lieutenant 
 colonel the point of direction to the right; this oflicer 
 will immediately establish, on the new direction, two 
 markers, distant from each otFier a little less than the 
 front of the first subdivision, the first marker in Iront 
 of the right file of this subdivision ; which being exe- 
 cuted heWill command: 
 
..^'^f 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALIQN—PART III. 71 
 
 1. Change direction by the right flank. 2. Battalion, 
 right — ^Face. 3. March [or double quick — 
 March.] 
 
 308. At the second command, t4ie column will fiice 
 to the right, and each chief of subdivision will place 
 himself by the side of his right guide. 
 
 309. At the command mareh, all the subdivisions 
 will step off together; the ri^ht guide of the lending 
 one v.ill direct himself from the first step, paiiiUelly 
 t»the markers placed in advance on the uew direc- 
 tion ; the chief of the subdivision will not follow the 
 movement, but sea it file past, and as soon as the left 
 guide shall have passed, he will command : 
 
 1. First company [or flrst division.^ 2. Halt. 
 
 3. Front. 4. left— Dress. 
 
 310^ At the fourth command, the subdivision will 
 place itself against the two markers, and be promptly 
 aligned by its chief. 
 
 311. The right guide of each of the following sub- 
 divisions will conform himself to the direction of the 
 right guide of the subdivision preceding his own in 
 the column, so as to enter on the new direction par- 
 allelly to that subdivision, and at the distance of four 
 paces from its rear- rank. 
 
 312. Each chief of subdivision will halt '}u his own 
 person, on arriving opposite to the left guides already 
 placed on the new direction, see his subdivision file 
 past, and conform himself, in halting and aligning it, 
 to what i« prescribed No. 309, 
 
7.i SCHOOL OF THE BATTALJON— PAJIT HI. 
 
 313. If the change oC direction b^^ by the left flank, 
 the cohmel will cau«e niar^pers to be estJiblished as 
 before, the first in front of the left file of the lead- 
 ing si^bdivision, and then gire the same commands, 
 substituting th'^ indication left for rigid. 
 
 314. At the second command, all the subdivisions 
 will face to the left, and each chief will place himself 
 by the side of his left guide. 
 
 315. At the commtfnd. march, all the subivisious 
 will step off together, each conducted by its chief. • 
 
 316. The guide of the leading subdivision will di- 
 rect himself, from the'' first step, parallelly to the 
 markers ; the subdivision will be conducted by its 
 chief; and as soon as its left guide shall have passed 
 the second marker, it will be halted and aligned as 
 prescribed above; and so of each ot the following 
 subdivisions. 
 
 317. The colonel will hold himself on the designa- 
 ted flank, to see that each subdivision enters the new 
 direction parallely to the leading one, and at the pre- 
 scribed distance from that which precedes. 
 
 318 The lieutenant colonel wdll place himself in 
 front of, and facing to, the guide of the leading sub- 
 division, and will assure the positions of the follow- 
 ing guidtis, as they successively arrive on the new di- 
 rection. 
 
 319. The major will follow the movement abreast 
 with the last subdivision. 
 
 320. In order that this movement may be executed 
 with facility and precision, it is necessary that tHe 
 leading subdivision should entire>y unmask the col- 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION -PART JII. 73 
 
 umn ; for example the ^iiovement being made by the 
 right flank, it is necessary before halting the leading 
 subdivision, that its left guide shall, at least, have ar- 
 rived at the place previously occupied by its right 
 guide, in order that each following subdivision w'hich 
 has to pass over a space at least equal to its front to 
 put itself in the new direction, and whose left ought 
 to pass the point at \Vliich the right had rested, may, 
 at the command halt, find itself iu its whole front, 
 parallel to the leading subdivision. 
 
 321. By this method there is no direction that may 
 not be giveu to a column iu mass. 
 
 Article N^tii. 
 
 Being in column at half distance, or closed in mass, to 
 take distances. 
 
 32"J. A column at half distance \\ill take full dis- 
 tance by the head of the column when it has to pro- 
 long itself on the line of battle. If oii the contrary, 
 it has to lorm itself in line of battle on the ground it 
 occupies, it will take distances on the leading or on 
 the rearmost subdivision, according as the one or 
 other may find itself at the point where the right 
 or left of the battalion ought to rest iu line of battle. 
 
 1st. To take distances by the head of the column. 
 
 323. The column being by company at half distance 
 and at a halt, when the coloael shall wish to cause it 
 
74 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALI-'N^PART III. 
 
 to take full distances by the head, be will command: 
 By the head of column, taJc(Licheeling\Hstance. 
 
 324. At this command, tbo captain of tbe leading 
 company will put in marcb ; to tbis end, be will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. First company, foncard. 2. Guide left. 3, 
 Marcji [or double quick— ^Iarcii.^ 
 
 325. Wben tbo second sbiill have nearly its wbeel- > 
 ing distance, its captain will command : 
 
 1. Second company, foncard. 2. Guide left. 3. 
 March [or double quick— '^l Alien. '\ 
 
 326. At tbe command march, wbicb will be pro- 
 nounced at tbe instant tbat tbis company sball'bave 
 its wbeelihg distance, it will step off smartly, taking 
 the step from tbe preceding company. JEach of tbe 
 other companies will successively execute what has 
 just been prescribed for the second. 
 
 327. Tbe colonel will see tbat each company piits 
 tself in marcb at tbe instant it has its distance. 
 
 328. Tbe lieutenant colonel will bold himself at tbe 
 bead of the column, and direct the marcb of the. lead- 
 ing guide. 
 
 329. The major will bold himself abreast with the 
 rearmost guide. 
 
 330. If the column, instead of being at a halt, be 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART HL 75 
 
 in march, the colonel will give the same commands, 
 and add : 
 
 March L<^i' double quick — March.] 
 
 331. If fhe column be marchiTio: in quick time, at 
 the command march, the captain of the leading com- 
 pany will cause double quick time to be taken; which 
 will also be done by the other captains as the com- 
 panies successively attain their proper wheeling dis- 
 tance. 
 
 332. If the column be marching in. double quick 
 time, the leading company will continue to march at 
 the same gait. The captains of the other companies 
 will causie quick time to be taken, and as each compa- 
 ny gains its proper distance, its captain will cause it 
 to retake the 'double quick step. 
 
 2d. To take distances on the rear of the column. 
 
 333. If the colonel wish to take distances on the 
 rearmost company, he will establish two markers on 
 the direction he shall wish to give to the line of bat- 
 tle, the first opposite to the rearmost company, the 
 second marker towards the head of the column, at 
 company distance from the first, and both facing to 
 the roar; at the same time, the right general guide, 
 on an intimation from the lieutenant colonel, will 
 move rapidly a little beyond the point to which the 
 head of the column will extend, and place himself 
 correctly on the prolongation of the two markers. 
 These dispositions being made, the colonel will com- 
 mand : 
 
 i,'.mtdj,^rA' jjTjt^.. 
 
76 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART HI. 
 
 I. On the eighth company, take wheeling distdiice. 2. 
 Column .forward. 3. Guide left. 4. March for 
 double quick — MARCH.] 
 
 334. At the third command, the captains will place 
 themselves two paces outside of the directing flank: 
 the captain of the eighth company will caution it to 
 stand fast. 
 
 3:?5. At the command rharch, repeated by all the 
 captains, except the captain of the eighth company, 
 this hitter company will stand fast; its chief will 
 align it by the left oh the first marker, who is oppo- 
 site to this company, and place himself before its 
 centre, after commanding: Front. At this com- 
 mand, the marker will retire, and the left guide will 
 take his place. 
 
 336. All the other companies will p*ut themselves 
 in march, the ^ide of the leading one djn-cting him- 
 self a little within the right general guide ; when the 
 seventh company has arrived opposite the second 
 marker, its captain will halt, and align it on this 
 marker, in the manner prescribed for the eighth com- 
 pany. 
 
 337. When the captain of the sixth company shall 
 see that there is, between his company and the 
 seventh, the necessary space for wheeling into line, 
 he will halt his company, the giiide facing to the 
 rear will place himself promptly on the direction, 
 and the moment he shall be assured in his position, 
 the captain will align the company by the left, and 
 theiv place himself two paces before its centre; the 
 other companies will successively conform them. 
 

 
 J 
 
 ^ • 
 
 r«lii»a5;ili!!Hr. 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 ■ t - . 
 
 1 
 
 A, 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 -^1 
 
 MM^ym-^ 
 
 
 
 i 
 ■i 
 
 
 d 
 
 b 
 
 ■| 
 
 ^fMEI^^Sm, 
 
 
 
 • 
 1 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 t 
 
 
 
 
 
 A 
 
 1 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 - 
 
 ■' 
 
 
 a'i!^a^tf\aia:r- 
 
 ^ K 
 
 A h 
 
 cj 
 
 L, 
 
 
 
 U 
 
 • 
 
 -' 
 
 u 
 
 
 
 • h 
 
 
 .J ' 
 
 
 .■i 
 
 1, 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 d — 
 
 fc 
 
 ^ i 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART III. 77 
 
 selves to what has just been prescribe'd for the sixth 
 company. 
 
 338. The colonel will follow.the movement, and see 
 that each company halts at the prescribed distance ; 
 lie will promptly remedy any fault that may be com- 
 mitted, and as soon as all the companies shall be align- 
 ed, he will cause the guides, who are faced to the 
 rear, to face about. 
 
 339. The lieutenant colonel will successively as- 
 sure the left guides on the direction, placing himself 
 in their rear, as they arrive. 
 
 340. The major will hold himself at the head of the 
 column, and will direct the march of the leading 
 guide. 
 
 3d. To take distances on the head of the column. 
 
 341. The colonel, wishing to take distances on~the 
 leading company, will establish two markers in the 
 manner juet prescribed, one abreast with this com- 
 pany, and the other at company distance in rear of the 
 first, but both facing to the front ; the left general 
 guide, on an intimation from the lieutenant c<»lonel, 
 will move rapidly to the rear and place himself cor- 
 rectly vn the prolongation of the two markers, a lit- 
 tle beyond the point to which the rear of the column 
 will extend: these dispositions being made, the colo- 
 nel will command : 
 
 On the first company, take whcelinor distance. 2. 
 Battalion, about FACE. 3. Column forward. 4. 
 Guide right. 5. March (or double quick — 
 March.) 
 
78 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART IIL 
 
 342. At the second command, all the eompaoies, 
 except the one designated, will face abont, the 
 guides remaining in the front aiuk, now become the 
 rear. 
 
 343. At the fourth command, the captains will 
 place themselves outside of their guides. 
 
 344. At the command march, the captain of the de- 
 signated company will align it. as prescribed, No. 335, 
 on the marker placed by its side. 
 
 345. The remaining companies wmII put themselves 
 in march, the guide of the rearmost one will direct 
 himself a little within the left general guide ; when 
 the second company shall have arrived ojsposite .the 
 second marker, its captain will face it about, con- 
 forming to what is prescribed, No. 270, and align it, 
 as has just been prescribed for the first company. 
 
 346. The instant that the tbird compary shall have 
 its wheeling distance, its captain will halt it facing it 
 about, as prescribed. No. 270, and align it by the left ; 
 the captains of the remaining companies will each, in 
 succession, conform himself to what has just been 
 prescribed for the .captain of the third. 
 
 347 The colonel will follow the movement, as in- 
 dicated No. 338; the lieutenant colonel and major 
 will conform themselves to what is prescribed, Nos. 
 339 and 340. 
 
 348. These various movements will be executed ac- 
 cording to the same principles in a column with the 
 left in front. . 
 
 349. They will be executed in like manner in a 
 column closed in muss ; but, if it be the wish of the 
 
_2£_ 
 
 /'^-, 
 
 °<^ 
 
 
 c^ 
 
 ^1 
 
 ^1 
 
 Hr,milfflllllllWffl'!iHllliilllf!l'g 
 
 r^:iiiiiiiyiiiiihiiiiiw"ii'iiiiiiiaii 
 
 mt 
 
 smsMBMmm 
 
 r^|iH!l!ll!i;i Ur!:i:i!mffii«! 
 
, SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART III. 79 
 
 colonel to open out the column to half, instead of 
 full distance, he will substitute in the commands, 
 the indication half, for that of wheeling distance. 
 
 350. In a column by division, distances will be taken 
 according to the same principles. 
 
 ^ Article Tenth. 
 
 Countermarch of a column at full or half distance. 
 
 351. In a column at full or half distance, the coun- 
 termarch will be executed by the means indicated, 
 school of the company; to this end, the colonel will 
 command : 
 
 1. Countermarch. 2. Battalion right for left) — Face. 
 3. By file left (or right.) 4. March (or double 
 quick — March. ) 
 
 To countermarch a column closed in mass. 
 
 352. If the column be closed in mass, the counter- 
 march will be executed by the commands and means 
 subjoined. 
 
 353. The column being supposed formed by a divi- 
 sion, right in front, the colonel will command : 
 
 1. Countermarch, 2. Battalion right and left — FACE. 
 3, By file left and right. 4. MARCH (or double 
 quick — March ) 
 
80 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART HL. 
 
 354 At the first command the chiefs of the odd 
 .numbered divisions will caution them to face to the 
 right, aud the chiefs of the others to i\ice to the- 
 left. 
 
 355. At the second. command, the odd divisions will 
 face to the right, and the even to the left ; the right 
 and left guides of all the divisions will face about ; " 
 the chiefs of odd divisions will hasten to their right 
 and cause two files to break to the rear, and each chief 
 place himself on the left of the leading front rank 
 man of his division ; the chiefs of even divisions will 
 hasten to their left, and cause two files to break to 
 the rear, and each chief place himself on the right of 
 his leading front rank man. 
 
 356. At the command march, all the divisions, each 
 conducted by its chief, will step off snmrtly, the 
 guides standing fast ; each odd division will wheel by 
 file to the left around its right guide ; each even divi- 
 sion will wheel by file to the right around its left 
 guide, each division so directing its march as to arrive 
 behind its opposite guide, and when its head shall be 
 up with this guide, the chief will halt the division, 
 and cause it to face to the front. 
 
 357. Each division, on fjicing to the front, will be 
 aligned by its chief by the right ; to this end, the 
 chiefs of the even divisions will move rapidly to the 
 right of their respective divisions. 
 
 358. The divisions being aligned, each chief will 
 command, Front; at this, the guides will shift to 
 their proper flanks. 
 
 359. In a column with left in front, the conn- 
 
^/ 
 
 rF- 
 
 z* 
 
 4 
 
 ./^^=? 
 
S(JH'H)L OF THE BATTALION— PART III. 81 
 
 tcnnarc-h will be executed hv the same commands 
 and means ; but all the divisi(»ns will be aligned by 
 the left ; to this < nd, the chiefs of the odd divisions 
 will hasten to the left of their respective divisions as 
 soon as the latter shall have been faced to the front. 
 
 300. Tte colonel, placed on the directing flank, 
 will superintend the general movement. 
 
 361. The countermarch being ended, the lieu- 
 tenant colonel will always place himself abreast with 
 the leading, and the major abreast with the rearmost 
 division. 
 
 362. In a column by company, closed in mass, the 
 countermarch will be executed by the same means 
 and commands, applying to companies what is pre- 
 scribed for divisions. 
 
 363. The countermarch will always take place 
 from a halt, w-hether the column be closed in mass, 
 or at full, or half distance. 
 
 Article Eleventh. 
 
 Being in column by company, closed in ynass, to 
 form divisions. 
 
 364. The column being closed in mass, right in 
 front, and at a halt, when th;^ colonel shall w^ish to 
 form divisions, he wiH command : 
 
 ]. Form divisions. 2. Left companies, left — Face. 
 
 3. March (or double quick— Maiwii.) 
 6* 
 
82 frCTIOOI- OF THE IJA'ITAI, ION-PART III 
 
 365. At t])e first coinnKiiici, the captains of the left 
 companies will caution them to iace.to the left. 
 
 366. ,At the ! second commnnd, the left c(!ii!p:niies 
 will fiice to tlie' left, Mnd their captains will place 
 theniselvcB by iho side ef their respective left guides. 
 
 367. The right companies, and their* captains, will 
 .-taodfast, but the right ajid left guides of each of 
 these coaipauies will piace themselves respectively^ 
 before the right and left files of the company, both 
 guides facing to the right, and each resting liis right 
 arm gently against the breast of the front rank man 
 of the "file, in order to mark the direction. 
 
 36S. At the couiiaai!-;] march, the left companies 
 only will, put themselves in march, tlieir captains 
 standing fist ; as each shall see that his company, 
 filing \)-dHt, has nearly cleared the column, he will 
 comuuiud : 
 
 .1. Such cowpany. 2. HALT. 3, FRONT. 
 
 369. The first command will be given when the 
 company shall yet have four paces to march ; the 
 second at the instant it shall have cleared its right 
 company, and the third immediately after the second. 
 
 370. The company having faced to the front,* the 
 files, if there be intervals between Ihem, will 
 promptly incline to th^ right ; the captain will place 
 himself on tlie left of the right company of the divi- 
 sion, iind ajign himself pprr^ectly o;ithe frout rank of 
 that company. 
 
SCilOOL OF THE BATTALION— I'ART III. 83 
 
 371. The left guide will nlace himself at the same 
 time l»etuie (sue of tiie three left files df his company, 
 Jace to the ri;,'ht, aiul ci)ver coirectly the guides of 
 the risiht company; the moment his eaptaio sees him 
 established on the direction, he will command : 
 
 Right— Dress. 
 
 '372 At this, Jjhe left company will dresi forward 
 rn the alignment of the right Company ; -the front 
 rank man, who may find himself opposite to the left 
 guide, will, without preceding his rank, rest lightly 
 t;is breast against the right arm of this guide.: the 
 captain of th^e left company will direct its alignment 
 on this man, and tlie alignment being assured, he w-ill 
 command, Front; but not quit his position. 
 
 378. The cjolonel seeing the divisions formed, will 
 conunand : ■ - . 
 
 Guides— FosTii. 
 
 374. At this, the guides who have marked the 
 fronts of divisions will return to tbeir places in col- 
 umn, the left guide of each right company passing 
 through the interval in the centre of the division, and 
 the captains vrtll place themselves as prescribed No. 
 75. 
 
 375. The colonel, from the directing flank of the 
 column, will superintend the geiieral executhjii of the 
 movement; • ■ :• i ■ 
 
 370. If the column be in march, instead of at a 
 
84 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART HI. 
 
 halt, when the coloucl shiill wish to form divisions, he 
 will coinuiand : 
 
 J. Form divisions. 2. Left companies, by the left 
 flank. 3. March (or double quick — March. 
 
 377. At tlie^ first command, the captains of the 
 right companies will command, Mark time, the cap- 
 tains of the left companies will caution their compa- 
 nies to face by the left flank. 
 
 378. At the third command, the right companies^ 
 will mark time, the left companies v/ill face to the 
 left ; the captains of the left companies will each see 
 his company file past him, and when it has cleared 
 the column, will command : 
 
 Such company by the right flank — March. 
 
 As soon as the divisions are formed, the colonel 
 will command : 
 
 4. Forward. 5. March. 
 
 379. At the fifth command, the column will resume 
 the gait at which it was marching previous to the 
 commencement of the movement. The guides of 
 each division will remain on the right and left of their 
 respective companies ; the left guide of the right 
 company will pass into the line of file closers, before 
 the two companies are united ; the right guide of the 
 left company will step in the rear rank. The cap- 
 tains will place themselves as prescribed No. 75. 
 
df 
 
 
 
 
 ^ \ 
 
 \ 
 
 ■ — p — 
 
 R 
 
 
 r 
 
 ^"■^!^mmmmm»- " 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 =»^,i!«:i\!HaiiMf,\im™i5P '■ - - - 
 
 ■ i- 
 
 - 
 
 S 
 
 ■ 
 
 : 
 
 
 
 -^ 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 f— 
 
 
 
 
 , 
 
 4;i!!'!!l!!ltlillillWliiBililllll!lll!M'- " 
 
 
 
 
 r 
 
 n 
 
 
 
 ■w 
 
 Y 
 
 'i 
 
 r 
 
 n 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 ^r 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 H 
 
 _h^ 
 
 i 
 
 r ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
SCHO 'L OF THE BATTALION—PART lU. 83 
 
 Being in column at full or half distance to form 
 divisions. 
 
 330. If tho column be at a halt, and, instead of 
 beinff closed in mass, .is at full or half distance, divi- 
 sions will be formed in the same manner ; but the 
 captaius of the left companies, if the movement be 
 made in quick timo, after commanding Fi«ONT, will 
 each place himself before the cetitro of bis company, 
 and command. 1. Such company forward. 2. Guide 
 right. 3. March. If the movement be made in 
 double quick time, each will coiumand as soon as his 
 company has cleared the column : 
 
 1. Such company by the right flank. 2. March. 
 
 381. The right guide of each company will so 
 direct his march as to arrive by the side of the man 
 on the left of the right company. The left company 
 being nearly up with the rear rank of the right c(un- 
 pany, its captain will halt it, and the movement will 
 be fiuished as prescribed No. 371 and following. 
 
 382. If the left be in front, the movement will be 
 executed by inverse means; the right companies will 
 conft)rm themselves to what is prescribed above for 
 the left companies ; and the two guides, placed re- 
 spectively, before the right and lelt files of each left 
 company, will face to the left. At the command, 
 Guides posts, given by the colonel, the girides, who 
 have mai-ked the front of divisions, and th ^captains, 
 will quickly retake their places in the column. 
 
 383. If the column be marching at full distance, 
 the divisions will be formed as prescribed No. 11)6. 
 If it be marching at half distance, the formation will 
 
«f> 8CHO0I. OF THE EATTAL.lUN— P.UJT lil. 
 
 take place by the coinmands, .'tnd acconliiig to the 
 principles iiidiciited No. ^76 ; if the column bo march- 
 iuj/ in dduJjle quick time, the companies which should 
 mark time will march in quick time by tLe coi-imands 
 of their captains. ' * 
 
 Rcurarhs on the formation of divisious from a halt. 
 
 3c4. As.thie moveniont may be cousidertd as the 
 element of deployment-;, it ought to he executed with 
 the utmost accuracy. ,^ 
 
 . 385. If companies mi'.rching by the flank ^lo not 
 preserve exactly their distances, there will be open- 
 ings between the files at the instauW)f facing to the 
 front. 
 
 38G. If captains halt their companies too early, 
 they will want space, and the files which have not 
 cleaied the flanks of the standing ce-mpanies \\ ill not 
 be abbvto dress into line without pushing their ranks 
 laterally. 
 
 387. If, on the contrary, the companies be hrjlted 
 too late, it will be neces^jary for them to incline to 
 the right or left in dressing ; and in deployments, 
 either of these faults would lend to error in the fol- 
 lowing C(uiipauies. 
 
 388. As often as a guide shall have to step out to 
 place himself before his subdivision in ordei- to mark 
 the direction, he v>ill be particularly carefnl to place 
 himself so as to be opposite to one of the rhree outer 
 files of the subdivisicm when they shall be aligned: if 
 ho t:ike too much distance, and neither of thoi^e files 
 finds itself against him, the chi<'fs of the sul-division 
 will have no a-s-iived ]>niur on whicli r<> dii'e<'!- the 
 alignment. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE J^ATTALI N— PART IV. 87 
 
 PART FOURTH. 
 
 Different modes of passing from the order in column to 
 the order in battle. 
 
 AliTICl.E FiRST. 
 
 Manner of determining the line of battle. 
 
 38';). The lino of battle may bo marked or deter- 
 mined in three ditFereilt manners : 1st, by placing 
 two markers ei<j;hty or a hundred paces ui'aU:, on the 
 direction it is wished to give to the line ; 2d, by 
 pla-cing a marker at the point at which it may be in- 
 tended to rest a flunk, and then chousing a secoL-d 
 point towards, or beyond the opposite flunk, and 
 there posting a Sr_'cond marker distant from each 
 other a little less thnn the leading subdivision ; 'M, 
 by choosing at first the points of dfrection for the 
 flanks, and then determining, by intermediate points, 
 the stra ght line between those seU-cted points, both 
 of which m. ay sometimes be beyond reach. 
 
 Article Second. 
 
 Difif rr at i:n);les of passing from cpliimn at full dis- 
 tance into line of battle. 
 
 1. To the left (or right) ^ 
 
 2. On the right (or left) i • , ,. , , ,., 
 
 3 Forward,^ ^ ^ Mnto Imeol battle. 
 
 4. Faced to tlie rear, J 
 
?8 SCPIOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART IV. 
 
 1st. Column at full distance, right in front, to the left 
 into line of battle. 
 
 390. A column, right in front, being at a halt, when 
 the coh)nel sh.-ill \\U\i to form it to the left into line, 
 he will assure the positions of the guides by the 
 means previously indicated, and then command: 
 
 1. Left into' line, ichcel. 2. March for douhlc quick 
 
 March.) 
 
 391. At the first command, the right guide of the 
 leading company will hasten to place himself on the 
 direction of the left guides of the column, face to 
 them, ;uid place himself so as to be opposite to one of 
 the three right files of his company, when they shall 
 be in line : he will be assured in this position by the 
 lieutenant colonel. 
 
 392. At the command march, briskly repeated by 
 the captains, the left front rnnk man of each com- 
 pany will face to the left, and rest his breast lightly 
 against the right arm of his guide ; the companies 
 will wheel to the left on the principle of wheeling 
 from a halt, conforming themselves to what is pre- 
 scribed, school of the cc^jnpany. No. 239 : each cap- 
 tain will turn to his company, to observe the execu- 
 tion of the movement, and when the right of the 
 company shall arrive at three paces fr* m the line of 
 battle, he will command : 
 
 1. Such company. 2. HALT. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART IV. 89 
 
 393. Tlie company being halted, the captain will 
 place himself on the lino by the side of the left front 
 rank man of the company next on the rights align 
 himself correctly and command : 
 
 3. Right— J) RF.SS. . 
 
 394. At this command, the company will dress up 
 between the captain and the front rank man on its 
 left, the captain directing the a'ignment on that man ; 
 the front rank man on the right of the right company, 
 who finds hiiuself opposite to its right guide, will 
 lightly rest his breast against the left arm of this 
 guide. 
 
 395. Each captain, having aligned his company, 
 will command, Front, and ihe colonel will add : 
 
 Guides^FosTH. 
 
 396. At this command, the guides will return to 
 their places in line of battle, each passing through 
 the nearest captnin's interval ; to permit iiim to pass, 
 the captain will momentarily step before the first 
 file of his company, and the covering sergeant behind 
 the same file. This rule is general for all the forma- 
 tions into line of battle. 
 
 397. When companies form line of battle, file 
 closers will always place themselves exactly two 
 paces from the rear rank, which will sufficiently as- 
 sure their alignment. 
 
 398. The battalion being correctly aligned, the 
 colonel, lieutenant colonel, and major, as well as the 
 adjutant and sergeant major, will return to their re- 
 spective places in line of battle. This rule is general 
 
90 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION PART IV. 
 
 for all the formations into line of battle ; ueTerlheless, 
 the battaiiou beiiiii in the school of the elouieiitary 
 instruction, the colonel will gtt to any pcsiat he may 
 deem necessary. 
 
 399. A cohunn with left in front, will form it 
 self to the ri^hl' into line of battle, acconlinc to the 
 same principles ; tlie left guide of tlie h'ft conjpany 
 will place himself, at the first command, on thv direc- 
 tion of the right guides, in a manner corresponding to 
 what is prescribed, No. 391, for the right guide of 
 the right company. 
 
 400. At the command guides posts, the captains 
 will take their phices in line of battle as well as the 
 guides.* This rule is general for all form at ions- into 
 line of battle in which the companies are aligned by 
 the left. 
 
 401. A column by division may form itself into line 
 of battle by the same couunands, and means, but 
 observing what follows ; if the right be in front, at 
 the command halt, given by the chiefs of division, the 
 left guide of each right company will place himself 
 on the alignment opposite to one of the thtee files ou 
 
 . the left of liifl company ; the left guide of the first 
 company will bo assured on the direction by the lieu- 
 tenant colonel ; the left guides of the other right 
 companies will align themselves correctly on the di- 
 visi(u», guides ; to this end, the divii^ion guides {on the 
 alignment) will nivert, and hold their pieces up per- 
 pendicularly before the centre of their bodies, at the 
 comm.ind left into line, tcheel. If the column by divi- 
 sion be with the left in front, the light guides of 
 left compani«^s will conform thems<dves to what has 
 just been prescribed -for the left guides of i-ighfc com- 
 
' SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART iV. 01 
 
 panics, and place theniselves on the line opposite to 
 one of the three right files of their reppective com- 
 panies. 
 
 402. A column in march will be fornsed into line, 
 withciut haltiuj?, by the same commands and means. 
 At the command march, the guides will halt in their 
 places, and the lieutrnaut-colonel will promptly rec- 
 tify their positions. 
 
 403. If, in forming the column into line, the cplonel 
 should wish to ni<»ve forward, without h;ilting, he will 
 command: 
 
 1. By companies left wheel. 2. March (or double, 
 quick — March.) 
 
 404. At the command march, briskly repeated by 
 the captains, each company will wheel to the left on 
 a fixed pivot, as prescribed in the school of the com- 
 pany, No. '261 ; the left guides will step back Into the 
 rank of file closers before the wheel is completed, 
 and when the right of the companies shall airive near 
 the line, the colouel will command : 
 
 3. Fonrard. 4. March. 5. Guide ce.vtre 
 
 405.. At the f 'u.rth command, given at the instant 
 the wheel is completed,' the companies will maix'h di- 
 rectly to the front. At the fifth command, the color 
 and the general guides will move rapidly six paces to 
 the front. The ccdonel will assure the direction of 
 the color, the captains of companies' and the men 
 will, at once, conform theuiselves to the principles of 
 the march In line of battle, to be hereinafter indi- 
 c;ited, No. 587, and tbllowing. 
 
92 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART IV. 
 
 406. The same principles are applicable to a col- 
 umn left in front. 
 
 By inversion to the Tight (or left) into Unc of battle. 
 
 407. When a column, right in front, shall be under 
 the necessity of forming itself into line faced to the 
 reverse flank, and the colonel shall wish to execute 
 this .formation by the shortest movement, he will 
 command : 
 
 1. By inversion, right into line, tchccl. 2. Battalion, 
 
 guide rigid. 
 
 408. At the first command, the lieutenant colonel 
 will place himself in front, and facing to the right 
 guide of the leading subdivision ; at the second com- 
 mand, he will rectify, as pnmiptly as possible, the 
 direction of the right guides of the c(»hunn ; the 
 captain of the odd company, if there" be one, and the 
 column be by division, will promptly bring the right 
 of his company on the direction, and at compaany dis- 
 tance from the division next in front; the left guide 
 of the leading su])division will place himself on the 
 direction of the right guides, and will be assui'ed in 
 his position by the lieuteiuint colonel ; which being 
 executed, the colonel will command : 
 
 3. March (or douhle quick — March.) 
 
 409. At this, the right front rank man of each sub- 
 division will fa e to the right, rest his breast lightly 
 against the left arm of his guide, and the battalion 
 
SCHOOL OP Tllii BATTALION— PART IV. 93 
 
 will form itself to the right into line of battle, accord- 
 ing to the principles prescribed; which being exe- 
 cuted, the colonel will comniaud : 
 
 Guides — Posts. 
 
 410. If the column be with the left in front, it will 
 form itself, by inversion, to the left into line, accord- 
 ing to the same principles. • 
 
 411. If the colonel should wish the battalion, when 
 formed into line of battle, to bo moved forward, the 
 movement will be executed by the commands, and 
 according to the principles indicated in No. 4U3; al 
 ways preceding the connnand, by companies right (or 
 left) wheet, by the command, by inversion. 
 
 Successive formations. 
 
 412. Under the denomination of successive forma- 
 tions are included all those formations where the 
 several subdivisions of a column arrive one after an- 
 other on the line of battle ; such are foruKitions on 
 the right, or left, forward and faced to the rear into 
 line of battle, as well as deployments of columns in 
 mass. 
 
 413. The successive formations w-hieh may be or- 
 dered when the ccdumn is marching, and is to con- 
 ;thme marching, will be executed by a combination of 
 the two gaits, quick and double quick time. 
 
94 SCIIOOL OF TUE BryrTALiON— PVliT IV. 
 
 J 
 
 2. Column at fidl disi§ncc, on thr, right (or on the \\\ 
 left), into line of battle. 
 
 414. A coluinji by coinpaiiy, at full distance aud 
 right in fVoiU, liaving to form itself on the right into 
 line of b.itile, theculiniel will indicate to the lieuten- 
 ant colonel a little in advance, the point of appiii, or 
 rest, for the .right, as well as the point^»f direction to 
 the left; the Heutenant colonel v\ill histfta with two\ 
 !nark(M-s, and establish tbem in the following manner-' 
 (ta the direction indicated. 
 
 415. The first marker wiii ■■:,■■: j*, ^^ ,l ,.. l:.v: poiui; , 
 i'i appwi for the right front rank man of the leading 
 company ; the second will indicate the point where 
 one of the three left files of the same company will 
 vest when in line ; they will be placed so as to pre- 
 sent the right shoulder to the battalion whiMi formed; 
 
 41G. These dispositions being made, the colonel 
 will command: 
 
 1. On the right, into line. 2. Battalion, guide right. 
 
 417. At the second coinraanj^ the jight will be- 
 come the directing flank, and the touch of the elbow 
 will be to that side ; the right guide of the leading 
 company will march straight forward until np with 
 the turning poiiit, and each following guide will 
 march in the trace •)f the one immediately preceding. 
 
 41-*. The le^iding company being n'enrly up with 
 the first marker, its captain \A-ill command: 3. Right 
 turn, and When the company is precisely up wnth this 
 marker, he will add: 2. MARCft. 
 
^£_ 
 
 4a. 
 
 i 
 
 JIPBIlik 
 
^ 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART IV. . 95 
 
 419. At the command" warcA, the company will 
 turn tit the right; tlie right guide will so dtl-ect him- 
 self as to b.ring the man next to him opposite to the 
 right marker, and when at three paces from him, the 
 captain will command: 
 
 1. First company. 2. Halt. 
 
 420. At the'secoBd coTniBai!.-!, thp company will 
 . !t; the files, not yet- in line, will I'riini promptly 
 
 the left guide will retire as a file closer ; and the cap- 
 tain will then command : 
 
 3 /?iV/.'i— DilESy. 
 
 4-21. At this command, the company will align it- 
 self; the' two men who find themselves opposite to 
 the two markers, wnll each lightly rest his breast 
 against the right arm of his marker ; the eapt.iiD pass- 
 ing to the right of the front rank, will direct the a liga- 
 ment on these two men. These rules are general for 
 all successive formations. 
 
 4-22. The second company will contin;;. , w,,,rch 
 straight forward ; when arrived (ipposite to tlie left 
 flank of the precedi;-g company, it will turn to the 
 right, and be formed on the line of battle, as has just 
 been prescribed; the right guide will direct himself 
 so as to come upon that line by the siL' if the man 
 on the left of the. first company. 
 
 4'23. At tlie distance of three paces f/ om the lin« 
 of battle, the C(»mpany will be halted by its captain, 
 who will phice himself briskly by the side of the man. 
 
96 SCHOOL CF THE BATTALION-PART IV. 
 
 on the left of the preceding company, and align hiin- 
 self correctly on its i'vont rank. 
 
 424. The left guide will, at the same time, place 
 himselt before one of the three left tiles of his com- 
 pany, and facing to the right he will place himself 
 accurately on the direction of the two markers of 
 the preceding company. 
 
 425. The captain will then coiymand : 
 
 Right— Dress. 
 
 426. At this command, the second company will 
 dress forward on the line ; the captain will direct its 
 alignment on the front rank man who has rested his 
 breast against the left guide ot the company. 
 
 427. The following companies will thus come suc- 
 cessively to form themselves on the line of battle, 
 each conforming itself to what has just been pre- 
 scribed for the one next- to the right ; and when they 
 shall all be established, the colonel will command : 
 
 Guides— FOSTS. 
 
 428. At this command the guides will take their 
 places in line of battle, and the markers placed be- 
 fore the right company will retire. 
 
 429. If the column be marching in quick time, and 
 the colonel should, wish to cause the movement to be 
 executed in double quick time, he will add the com- 
 mand : Double quick — Maruii. At the command 
 march, all the companies will take the double quick 
 
BCflObL OF'TTIE BATTALION— PART IV. 97 
 
 step, ami tho movf^iner.t will be executed as prescrib- 
 ed, No. 417, and folluwing. 
 
 430. Tlie colonel will fidiowup the fornuntion, pass- 
 ing along in front, and being always opposite' to the 
 company about to turn ; it is thus that he will be the 
 better able to see and to correct the error that would 
 result from a command given too soon or too late to 
 the preceding company. 
 
 431. The lieutenant colonel will, with the greatest 
 care, assiire the direction of the guides; to this end, 
 the instant that the markers are established for the 
 leading company, he will move a little beyond the 
 point at which the left of the next company will 
 rest, establish himself correctly on the prolongation 
 of the two markers, and assure the guide of the se- 
 cond company t>n this direction ; this guide being as- 
 sured, the lieutenant colonel will place himself far- 
 ther to the rear, in order to assure in like manner, 
 the guide of the third company, and so on succes- 
 eively, to the left of the battalion. In assuring the 
 guides of their positions on the line of battle, he will 
 take care to let them first place themselves, and con- 
 fine himself to rectifying their positions, if they do 
 not cover accurately, and at the proper distance, the 
 preceding guides or markers. This rule is general 
 for all successive formations. 
 
 432. A column, left in front, will form itself on the 
 left into line of battle according to the same princi- 
 ples ; the captains will go to the left of their respective 
 companies to align them, and shift afterwards to their 
 proper flanks, as prescribed, No. 400. 
 
 7^ 
 
98 SCHOOL 'F THE BATTALION— PART IV. 
 
 Remarks on the formation on the right, or left^ into line 
 of battle. 
 
 433. In order that this movement may be executed 
 with reguh«-ity, it is necessary to establish the line of 
 battle so that the guide of each company, after turn- 
 ing, may haye at least ten steps tti take, in order to 
 
 come upon that line. 
 
 434. Ill the first exercises, the line of battle will 
 be establi.vhed on a direction parallel to that (if the 
 column ; but when the captains and guides shall com- 
 prehend the mechanism of the movement, the colonel 
 will generally choose oblique directions, in order to 
 habituate the battalion to form itself in any direc- 
 tion. 
 
 435. When the directicm of the line of battle forme 
 a sensible angle withthat of the march of the column, 
 the colonel, before beginning the movement, will give 
 the head of the column a new direction parallel to 
 that line; to this end, he will indicate to the guide of 
 the leading company a point in advance, on which 
 this guide will immediately direct himself, and the 
 company will conform itself to the direction of its 
 guide, at the command, or on a mere caution, of the 
 captain, according as the change of directi(m may re- 
 quire; each following company will make the same 
 movement, on the same ground, as it shall successive- 
 ly arrive. By this means the guides of all the com- 
 panies in th'e column will have, after turning, nearly 
 the same number of paces to lake ia order to come 
 upon the hue of battle. 
 
 436. Every captain will always observe, in placing 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART IV. 99 
 
 himself on tliat line, -not to give the command dress, 
 until after the guide of his company shall have been 
 assured on the directi<)n by the lieutenant colonel. 
 This rule is general for all successive formations. 
 
 437. 'Each captain ^^^ll cause his compwiy to sup- 
 port arms, the instant that the captain, who follows 
 him, shttli have commanded /rowf. This rule is gen- 
 eral for all successive formations. 
 
 438. When in the execution of this movement, the 
 colonel shall wish to c<»inmence firing, he will give 
 the order to that effect to the-captain whose compa- 
 uy is the first in line of battle ; this captain will im- 
 mediately place himself behind the centre of his com- 
 pany, and as soon as the next captain shall have com- 
 nirtiided front, he will commence the fire by file, by 
 the commands prescribed, school of the company. 
 At the command Jire by file, the marker at the outer 
 file ot this first company will retire, and the other 
 will place himself against the nearest man of the 
 next company. The captain of the latter will com- 
 mence firing as soon as the captain of the third com- 
 pany, ill line, shall have couimanded/ron<; the mark- 
 er before the nearest file of the second company, in 
 line, will now retire, and the guide before the oppo- 
 site flank will place himself before the nearest file of 
 the third company, in line, and so on, in continuation, 
 to the last company on the left or right of the battal- 
 ion, according as the formation may have commenced 
 with the right or left in front. 
 
 439. In all the successive formations, the same 
 principles will be observed for the execution of the 
 fire by file. This fire will always be executed by the 
 command of each captain of company. 
 
100 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART IV. 
 
 3d. Column at full distance, forward into line of battle. 
 
 440. A column being by company, at full distance, 
 right in front, and at a halt, when the colonel shall 
 wish to form it forward into line, he will conform 
 to what is prescribed Nos. 414 and 415, aud then 
 command: 
 
 1. Forward into line. 2. By company, left half wheel. 
 3. March (or double quick — March.) 
 
 441. At the first command, the captain of the lead- 
 ing company will add guide right, put the company 
 in march, halt it three paces from the markers, and 
 align it against the latter by the right. 
 
 442. At the command march, all the other compa- 
 nies will wheel to the left on fixed pivots ; and, at 
 the instant the colonel shall judge, according to the 
 direction of the line of battle, that the companies 
 have sufficiently wheeled, he will command: 
 
 4. Forward. 5. Marcil 6. Guide right. 
 
 443. At the fifth command, the companies ceasing 
 to wheel, will march straight forward, and at the 
 sixth, the men will touch elbows towards the right. 
 The right guide of the second company, who is near- 
 est to the line of battle, will march straight forward; 
 each succeeding right guide will follow the file im- 
 mediately before him at the cessation of the wheel. 
 
 444. The second company having arrived opposite 
 
 di^i^feMflkiii^ldiMliiaiilMMid 
 
-ff^. 
 
 ■ jmM^mmmmmmMmm&iimmM:M - ^ 
 
 
 Mmt^ 
 
 \ 
 
 4Sl„:-f 
 
 qt;^ 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART IV. 101 
 
 to the left file of the first, its captain will cau?:e it to 
 turn to the right, in order to approach the line of bat- 
 tle; and when its right guide shall be at three paces 
 from that line, the captain. will command: 
 
 1. Second company. 2. Halt. 
 
 445. At the second command, the company will 
 halt ; the files not yet in line with the euide will 
 come into it promptly, the left guide will place him- 
 self oi! the line of battle, so as to be opp<»site to one 
 of the three. files on the left of the company ; and as 
 soon as he is assured on the direction by the lieuten- 
 ant colonel, the captain, having placed himself accu- 
 rately on the line of battle, will command : 
 
 3 Right— Bmesh. 
 
 446. At the instant that the guide of the second 
 company begins to turn to the- right the gtiide of the 
 third, ceasing to follow the file immediately Iiefore 
 him, will march straight forward; and, when he shall 
 arrive opposite to the left of the second, his captain 
 will cause the company to turn to the right, in order 
 to approach the line of battle, halt it at three paccR 
 from that line, and align it by the right, as prescribed 
 for the second company. 
 
 447. Each following company will execute what 
 has just been prescribed for the third, as the 4)reced- 
 Id^ company shall turn to the right, in order to ap- 
 proach the lirfe of battle. 
 
102 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART IV. 
 
 448. The formatiou ended, the colonel will com- 
 mand : 
 
 Guides — POSTS. 
 
 449. The colonel and lieutenant colonel will ob- 
 serve in this iortnation, what is prescribed for them 
 on the right into line. , 
 
 450. A column left in front, will form itself for- 
 ward into line of battle according to the same princi- 
 ples and by inverse means. 
 
 4.^1. When a column b)' company at full di tance, 
 rijElht in front, and in mairh, shall arrive behind the 
 right of the line on which it is to form into battle, the 
 colonel and lieutenant colonel will coniorni them- 
 selves to what IS prescribed Nos. 414 and 415. 
 
 452. The head of the C(dumn having arrived at 
 company distance from the two markers established 
 on the line, the colonel will command: 
 
 1. Foncard into line. 2. By company, left half wheel. 
 ?>. March (or double quick — March^J 
 
 453. At the'first command, the captain of the first 
 company will .command Guide right, and caution it 
 to march directly to the front, the ciiptaius of the 
 other companies will caution them to wheel to the 
 left. 
 
 454. At the command marrh, briskly repeated by 
 the captains, the first company will continue to march 
 to the front, taking the touch of elbows to the right. 
 Its chief will halt it at three paces from the mark- 
 ers, and align it by the right. The other companies 
 will wheel to the left on fixed pivots, and at the in- 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART IV. 103 
 
 stant the. colonel shall' judge that they have wheeled 
 sufficiently, he will command: 
 
 4. Forward. 5. MauciI- G. Guiflc right. 
 
 455. At the fifth command, the companies will 
 cease to wheel ami move forward. At the sixtli, tliey 
 will take the touch of elbows to the riyht. The 
 movement will be executed ag previously explained. 
 
 456. If the colonel should wijsh to form the column 
 forward into line, and c((ntinue to maich in this 
 order, he will not cause markers to be establi^vhed ; 
 the nufvement will be executed in double quick time, 
 by the, same commands and means, but with the fol- 
 lowing nu;dificatious. 
 
 457. At the first command, the captain of the first 
 coTflpany will add quick time atter the command ^uiV/c 
 right. At the second command, the first company 
 will continue to march in quick time, and wi!l take 
 the touch of elbows to the right; its chief will imme- 
 diately place himself on its right, and to ssure the 
 march will take p(»ints of direction to the front. The 
 captain of (he second company will cause his com- 
 pany to take the san)e gait as soon as it shall arrive 
 on a line with the first, and will also move to the 
 right (tfjjjis company; the captiiins of the third and 
 f<»urth ct>mpaiiies will execute successively what has 
 just been prescribed for the second. The companies 
 will pre.«^erve the tonch of elbows to the right, until 
 the command guide centre. 
 
 458. AVhen the color company shall have entered 
 
104 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PAliT IV. 
 
 the line, the colouel will commaud guide centre. At 
 tTiis'cunmiand, the color-bearer and the righ*-* general 
 guide will move I'iqiidly six paces in iidvaiice tjf the 
 line. The colonel will iibsiue the diiection of the 
 Cdlor-l earer. The liciltpnant colonel and the right 
 companies will iiun)ediately conform themselves to 
 the principles of the march in line of battle. The 
 left companies and tiie k^ft general guide, as tbey ar- 
 rive on the line, will also conform to the same prin- 
 ciples. If the column be marching in double quick 
 time, when the last company shall have arrived on the 
 line, the colonel will cause the double quick to be 
 resumed. 
 
 459. It is not necessary that the movement be en- 
 tirely C(»mpleted, before halting the teattalion. As 
 soon as the part of the battalion already formed shall 
 have arrived on the line of battle, the colonel will 
 halt the battalion ; the companies not in line wiHeach 
 complete the movement. 
 
 Remarks on the formaiion forward, into line of battle. 
 
 460. The precision of this movement depends on 
 the direction the companies have at the moment the 
 colonel commands Foncard — March. The^^donel 
 will judge nicely the point of time for gi^iff^ this 
 commaud, observing that, if the direction of the line 
 of battle form with that <»f the column a right, or 
 nearly a right angle, the companies ought to wheel 
 about the eiglithof tlie circle, and that the mose accu- 
 rate the angle formed by the two directions, so much the 
 
 r=ihL^M;ki.^tkmi^i^tm^mMtlk 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART IV. 105 
 
 more the Gompanies ought to wheel before marching 
 straight forward. 
 
 461 It is important that each company in march- 
 ing towards the line of battle should turn exactly 
 opposite the point where its captain ought to place 
 himst-'lf on that line; if a company turn too soon, it 
 will find itself masked, in part, by that which pre- 
 ceded it on the line of battle, and be obliged to un- 
 mask itself by. the oblique step; if it turn too late, 
 it will leave an interval between itself and the pre- 
 ceding company to be regained in like manner. In 
 either ease, the next coni| any will l)e led into error, 
 and the fault propagated to the opposite tlank of the 
 battalion, 
 
 4^2. The guide of ea,ch company ought so to regu- 
 late hin)self in turning, as to bring his company to the 
 halting point parallelly with the line of bajttle. 
 
 463. If the angle formed by the line of battle and 
 the primitive direction of the ctdumn be so acute, that 
 the companies on arriving opposite to their respec- 
 tive places on the line of battle, find themselves iicarr 
 ly parallel to it, the captains will not give tbe com- 
 mand right (or left) turn, but each halt his company, 
 place himself on the line, and command : 
 
 Right {ovJeft) — Dress. 
 
 464. If, on the contrary, the angle formed by the 
 line of battle and the primitive direction of the 
 columu be much greater than a right angle, the 
 formation should bo executed not by the movement/or- 
 ward into line of battle, but by that of on the right (or 
 
]06 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART IV 
 
 left) into line of battle, and according to the princi- 
 ples prescribed for this formation. 
 
 465 If a company encounter an obstacle Rofficiont 
 to prevent it from marching by the front, it \^ ill right 
 (or left) fare in marching, by the c<»miiiaii(ls and 
 means indicated in tiie school of the con)pa)iy, Nnig. 
 314 and 315. The guide will continue to follow the 
 same file behind which he was marching, and will 
 maintain exactly the same distance from the compa- 
 ny immediately preceding his own. The obstacle be- 
 ing passed, the company will be formed into line by 
 the command of its captain. 
 
 Ath. Column at full distance, faced to the rear, into 
 line of battle. 
 
 466. A column being by company, at full distance, 
 right in front, and at a halt, when the colonel shall 
 wish to form it into line faced to the rear, he and the 
 lieutenant cobniel will conform themselves to what is 
 prescribed N(»s. 414 and 415, and the colonel will 
 then command: 
 
 1. Into line, faced to the rear. 2. Battalion, right— 
 Face. 3. March (or double quirk — March). 
 
 467. A.t the first command, th'^ captain of the lead- 
 ing company will cause it to face t<» the right, and put 
 it in march, causing it to wheel by file to the left, and 
 direct its march towards the line of battle which it 
 will pass in rear of the left marker;, the fir.'-t file 
 having passed three paces beyond the line, the com- 
 pany wHl wheel again by file to the left, in order to 
 
j ^'-?u"» ' t w ' -w- jii M' "'r^r 
 
left) in 
 pies pr 
 
 465 
 to prev 
 (or lej 
 means 
 314 am 
 same 1 
 raainta 
 uy imu 
 iiig paf 
 the coi 
 
 466. 
 right ■ 
 wish tt 
 lieuten 
 prescri 
 then C( 
 
 1. Intc 
 Fa( 
 
 467. 
 irig COI 
 it in m 
 direct 
 will p; 
 having 
 pany v 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATT.LLION— PART IV. • 107 
 
 place itself in rear of the two markers ; being in 
 this position, its captain will halt it, face it to the 
 front, and align it by the right against the markers. 
 
 468. At the second command, all the other compa- 
 nies will face to the right, each captain i)lacing him- 
 self by the side of his right guide. 
 
 460. At the command march, the companies will 
 put themselves in movement ; the left guide of the 
 second, who is nearest to the line of battle, will hasten 
 in advance to mark that line; he will place himself 
 ou it as prescribed above for successive formations, 
 and thn« indicate to his captain the.point at which he 
 ought to pass the line of battle, by three p;ices, in 
 order to wheel by tile to the left, and then to direct 
 his company parallelly to that line. 
 
 470. As soon as the first file of this company shaU 
 have arrived near the left file of 'the preceding one 
 already on the line of battle, its captain will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. Second company. 2. Halt, 3. Front. 4. 
 Right — Dress. 
 
 47 J. The first conrmand will be given when the 
 comp;niy sh;ill yet have four paces to take to reach 
 the halting point. 
 
 472. At the second command, the company will 
 halt. 
 
 473. At the third, the company will face to the 
 front, and if their he openings between th*' files, the 
 latter will promptly tdose to the -right; the captain 
 will immediately place himself by the side of the man 
 
108 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART IV. 
 
 on the left of the preceding company, and align hina- 
 self on its front rank. 
 
 474. The fourth couunand will be executed as pre- 
 scribed, No. 426. 
 
 475. The following companies will be conducted 
 and estnblished on the line of battle as just prescrib- 
 ed for the second, each regulating itself by the one 
 that precedes it ; the left guides will detach them- 
 selves in time to precede their respective companies 
 on the Hue by twelve or fifteen paces, and ench place 
 himself so as to be opposite to one of the three left 
 files of his company, when in line. If the movement 
 be executed in double quick time, the moment it is 
 commenced, all the left guides will detach themselves 
 at the same time from thn column, and will move at 
 a run to establish themselves- on the line of battle. 
 
 476. The formation ended, the colonel will com 
 mand : 
 
 Guides— FosTS. 
 
 477. The colonel and lieutenant colonel, in this 
 "formation, will each observe what is prescribed for 
 him in that of on the right, into line of battle. 
 
 478. A column, left in front, will form itself faced 
 to the rear into line of battle, according to the same 
 principles, and by inverse means. 
 
 479. If the column be in march, and should arrive 
 in front of the right of the line on which it is to form 
 into battle, the colonel and lieutenant col. uel will 
 conform to what is prescribed, N(»s. 414 and 415. 
 
 480. When the head of the column shall be nearly 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART IV. 109 
 
 at company, distance from the two markers establish- 
 ed on the line, the colonel will command : 
 
 1. Into line, faced to the rear. 2.- Battalion, by the 
 right flank. 3. March (or double quick — March.) 
 
 481. At the first command, the captains will cau- 
 tion their companies to face by the right flunk. 
 
 4^. At the command march, briskly repeated by 
 the captains of companies, all the companies will face 
 to the right; the first company will then wheel by file 
 to the left, and be directed by its captain a little to 
 the re.tr of the left marker ; then pass three paces 
 beyond the linej and wheel again by file to the left; 
 having arrived on the line, the captain will halt the 
 company, and align it by the right. The remaining 
 part of the movement will be executed as heretofore 
 explained. 
 
 483. The foregoing principles are applicable to a 
 column, leti in front. 
 
 484. As the companies approach the line of battle, 
 it is necessary that the captains should so direct the 
 march as to cross that line a little in rear of their re- 
 spective guides, who are faced to the basis of the 
 formation ; hence each guide ought to detach himself 
 in time to find himself correctly established on the 
 direction before his company shall come up with 
 him. 
 
no SCHOOL OF THE BATTALIOxN- PART IV. 
 
 Article Third. 
 
 Formation in line of battle by tico movements. 
 
 485. If a column by company, riji^ht in front, and 
 at a halt, find itself in ]);irt on tLc lino of b:ittle, and 
 the colonel should think pioper to foriu line of "bat- 
 tle before all the companies enter the new direction, 
 the foi mation will be executed in the ftillowing man- 
 Dei-. 
 
 486. It will be supposed that the column has ar- 
 rived behind the line of battle, and that five compa- 
 uies have entered th<^ new direction. The colonel 
 litiving assured the guides of the first five companies 
 on the direction, will command : 
 
 1. Left into line, wheel. 2. Three rear companies, 
 foricard into line. 
 
 487. At the second commaiHi, the chief of each of 
 the rear companies will command : By company, left 
 half wheel; and the colonel will add : 
 
 3. March (or double qmick—MxRCU.) 
 
 488. At this command, britVly repeated, the first 
 five companies will form themselves to the left into 
 line of battle, and the three last foricard, into line of 
 battle, by the means prescribed for these respective 
 formations ; each captain (tf the three, i-ear companies 
 will, when his company shall hav« sufficieutiy wheel- 
 ed, command : 
 
SCH OL OF THE BATTALION -PART IV. Ill 
 
 1. Forward. 2. March. 3. Guide right. 
 
 489. If the column be in march, the colonel will 
 commaud: 
 
 1. To the left, and forward into line.' 2. March (or 
 double quick — MARCH.) 
 
 490. At the first command, the captains of those 
 conipauie.s which have not entered on the new direc- 
 tion, will command : By company, left half trheel. 
 At the command march, bri.-kly repeated, the tirstfive 
 conip;Tnics will form left into line, and the last three 
 forwaid into line, as prescribed for these respective 
 formati(»ns. Those captains who form their companies 
 forward into line will conform to what is prescribed, 
 No. 488. 
 
 49J. If the colonel should wi-'h, in forming the bat- 
 talion into line, to march it immediately forward? he 
 will command : 
 
 1. By company to the left, and forward into line. 
 2. March. 
 
 492. At the first command, each captain, whose 
 company is not yet in the new direction, will com- 
 mand : 1. By company, left half wheel. 2. DoiMe 
 quick. At the command march, briskly repeated by 
 the captains, the companies not in the new direction 
 will execute what is prescribed above for. forming 
 forward into line while marching; each of the other 
 companies will wheel to the left on a fixed pivot, and 
 
112 SCriOOL OF THE RATTALION-PART IV 
 
 whon t"he right of these companies shall arrive on the 
 line, the colonel will command : 
 
 3. Forward. 4. March, 5. Guide centre. 
 
 493. The fifth command will be given when the 
 color-bearer arrives on the line, if not already there. 
 
 494. If the, battalion be marching in double quick 
 time, the colonel will cause quick time to be taken 
 before commencing the movement. 
 
 495. If, instead of arriving behind, the column 
 should arrive before the line of battlCfthecoloiiel will 
 command : 
 
 1. Left into line, ichcel. 2. Three rear companies into 
 line, faced to the rear. 
 
 496. At the second command, the captain of each 
 of the three rear companies will command : 1. Such 
 company ; 2. Right — Face. The colonel will then add: 
 
 3. March for double quick — March.) 
 
 497. At this command, briskly repeated, the first 
 five companies will form themselves to the left into 
 line of battle, and the three Vdfit faced to the rear, into 
 line of battle, by the means prescribed for these re- 
 spective formations. 
 
 498. If the column be in marcb, tlie colonel will 
 command : 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART IV. . 113 
 1. To the Irft, and into line faced to the rear. 
 2. March (ov double quick— "SIarcu.) 
 
 49i). This movement will be executed as prescribed 
 Nos. 39J, 480, and following. 
 
 500. These several movements in a colunm, left in 
 fnmt, will be executed according to the same prin- 
 ciples, and by inverse means. 
 
 Article Fourth. 
 
 Different modes of passing from column at half dis- 
 ■ tance, into line of battle. 
 
 1. To the left or (right) ^ 
 
 2. On the right (or left) ( • i. t c i L^^ 
 
 3. Forward by deployment, f ^^^'^ ^"^^ ^^ ^''^^^le. 
 
 4. Faced to the rear, J 
 
 1st. Column at half distance, to the left (or right) 
 into line of battle. 
 
 501. A column at half distance having to form it- 
 self to the right for left) into line of battle, the co- 
 lonel will cause it to take distances by one of the 
 means prescribed. Article IX., Part third, of this 
 school ; which being executed, he will form the col- 
 umn into line of battle, as has been indicated, No. 390, 
 and following. 
 
 502. If a column by company, at half distance be 
 in maorch, and it be necessary to form rapidly into line 
 of battle, the colonel will command : 
 
114 f^CIIOOL OF THE HATTALK)N-PART IV. 
 1. By the rear of column left (or right) into line, icheel^ 
 2. March for double quick — Mar€h.) 
 
 503. At the first command, the right jjeneral fjuide 
 will move ntpidly to the tr(»nt, and phice himself a 
 little beyond the point where the head of the column 
 will rest, and on the prolongation of the guides. The 
 capt;iiii of tbe eighth compjiny will eommajid : Left 
 into line, ithccl; the other captains will caution their 
 companies to continue to march to the front. 
 
 504. At the command march, briskly repeated by 
 the captain of the eighth company, tlie guide of this 
 company will halt short, and the company will wheel 
 to tlie left, conforming to the principles prescribed 
 for w4ieeling from a halt ; when its right shall arrive 
 near the line, the captain will halt the company, and 
 align it by the left. The other captains will place 
 themselves briskly on the flank of the column ; when 
 the captain of the seventh sees there is sufiicient dis- 
 tance between his company and the eighth to form 
 the latter into line, he wuU command: Left into line, 
 wheel — March; the lelt guide will halt short, and 
 facing to the rear, will place himself on the line; the 
 company will wheel to the left, the man on the left of 
 the front rank will face to the left, and place his breast 
 against the left arm of the guide ; the captain will 
 halt the company when its right shall arrive near the 
 Hue, and will align it by the left. The other compa- 
 nies will conform successively to what has just been 
 prescribed for the seventh. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION -PART IV. 115 
 
 505. E:ich captain will direct the alignment of his 
 company on the left man in the front rank of the com- 
 p-ciny next on his right. 
 
 5UG. The lieutenant colonel will be watchful that 
 the leading guide marches accurately on the pro- 
 longation of the line of battle, and directs himself on 
 the right general guide. The major placed in rear 
 of the left guide of the eighth company, will, as soon 
 as the guide of the seventh company is established on 
 the direction, hasten in rear of the guides of the ( ther 
 companit's, so as to assure each of them in accession 
 on the line. 
 
 2. Column at half distance, on the right (ox lift) into 
 line of battle. 
 
 507. A column at half distance will form itself on 
 the right Cor left) into line of battle, as prescrired for 
 a column at full distance. 
 
 3rf. Column at half distance, forward, into 'ine of 
 . battle. 
 
 508. If it be wished to form a column at half dis- 
 tance, forward into line of battle, the colonel will first 
 cause it to close in mass and then deploy it on the 
 leading company. 
 
 Ath. Column at half distance, faced to the rear, into 
 
 line of battle. 
 
 509. A column at half distance will be formed into 
 line of battle, faced to the rear, as prescribed for a 
 column at full distance. 
 
iig school of the battalion— part iv. 
 Article Fifth. 
 
 Deployment of columns closed in mass. 
 
 510. A column in mass may be formed into lino of 
 battle: 
 
 i . llaced to the front, by the deployment. 
 
 / 
 2. I'aced to the, rear, by the countermarch and 
 4 the deployment. 
 
 Jf'aced to the right and faced to the left, by a 
 change of direction by the flank, and the de- 
 ployment. 
 
 511. tVhen a column in mass, by division, arrives 
 behind he line on which it is intended to deploy it, 
 the colqiel will indicate in advance, to the lieutenant 
 colonelJthe direction of the line of battle, as well as 
 the poitft on which he may wish to direct the column. 
 The lieiteuant colonel will immediately detach him- 
 self wim two markers, and establish them on that 
 line, thi first at the point indicated, the i^econd a little 
 less thap the front of a division from the first. 
 
 512. Deployments will always be made upon lines 
 parallel, and lines perpendicular to the line of battle ; 
 consequently, if the head of the column be near the 
 line of battle, the colonel will commence by establish- 
 ing the direction of the column perpendicularly to 
 that line, if it be not already so, by one of the means 
 indicated, No. 244 and following, or No. 307 and fol- 
 lowing. If the colunm be in march^he will so direct 
 

f 1 
 
 r 
 
 %h 
 
 \ -I 
 
 
 1, ;■ 
 
 .Vg'W 
 
 ■' ^ 
 
 M^: 
 
 M X'. H 
 
 'M- t■-.;•:..«^,>l»■:•■•^ v 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART IV. li- 
 
 lt that it may arrive exactly behind the markers, per- 
 pendicularly to the Hue of battle, and halt it at three 
 paces from that line. 
 
 513. The column, right in front, being halted, it is 
 supposed that the colonel wishes to deploy it on the 
 first division ; he will order the left general guide to 
 go to a point on the line of battle a little beyond that 
 at which the left of the' battalion will rest when de- 
 ployed, and place himself correctly on the prolonga- 
 tion of the markers established before the fir^st divi- 
 sion. 
 
 514. These dispositions being made, the colonel will 
 command : 
 
 1. On the first division, deploy column. 2. Battalion, 
 left — Face. 
 
 515. At the first command, the chief of the first di- 
 vision will caution it to stand fiist ; the chiefs (»f the 
 three other divisions will remind them that they will 
 have to iace to the left. 
 
 516 At •the second command, the three last divi- 
 sions will face to the left; the chief of each division 
 will place himself by the side of its left guide, and 
 the junior captain by the side of the covering ser- 
 geant of the left company, who will have stepped into 
 the front rank- 
 
 517. At the same command, the lieutenant colonel 
 will place a third marker on the alignment yf the two 
 first, opposite to one of the three left files of the right 
 cunip;iny, first division, and then place himself on the 
 line«of battle a few paces beyond the point at which 
 the left of the second division will rest. 
 
118 SCHOOL OF THE BA7 TALION— PART IV. 
 
 518. The colouel will then coinuiaud: 
 
 3. March (or donUc quick — March.) 
 
 519. At this command, the chief of the first divi- 
 sion will go to its right, and command: 
 
 /^i/r/'f— Dress. 
 
 5"20. At this, the division will dress up against the 
 markers ; the chief of the division, and its junior cap- 
 tain, will each align the company on its left, and then 
 command : 
 
 Front. 
 
 521. The three divisions, faced to the left, will put 
 themselves in march ; the left guide of the sec-ond 
 will direct himself parallelly to the line of battle ; the 
 left guides of the third and fourth division will march 
 aljreast with the guide of the second; the guides of 
 the third and fourth, each preserving the prescribed 
 distance between himself and the guide of the division 
 which pretjeded his own in the colunm. 
 
 522. The chief of the second division will not fol- 
 low its movement; he will see it file l>y him, and 
 when its right guide shall be abreast with him, ho 
 will command : 
 
 1. Second division. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART IV. 119 
 
 52"*. The first C(nmnand will be given when the 
 division shall yet have seven or eight paces to march; 
 the second, when the right, guide shall be abreast 
 with the chief of the division, and the third iiuoiedi- 
 ately after the second. 
 
 524. At the second command, the division will halt; 
 at the third, it will f tee to the front, and if there be 
 openings between the files, the chief of the division 
 will cause them to be promptly closed to the right; 
 the left guides of both companit's will step upon the 
 line of battle, face to the right, and place themselves 
 on the direction of the markers e.^tablisbeil before 
 the first division, each guide opposite to one of the 
 three left files of his company. 
 
 rvio. The division having faced to the front, its 
 chief will place himself accurately on the line of bat- 
 tle, on the left of the first division ; and when he shall 
 see the guides assured on the direction, he will com- 
 mand. Right — Dress. At this, the division will be 
 aligned by the right in the manner indicated for the 
 first. 
 
 r>0(). The third and fourth division will continue to 
 march: at the commind halt, given to the second, 
 the chief of the third will halt in his own person, 
 place himself exactly opposite to the guide of the 
 second, after this division shall have faced to the front 
 and closed its file-; he will see his division file pasj;, 
 and when his right guide shall be abreast with him, 
 he will command : 
 
 1. Third division. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 
 
 527. As soon as the divisicm faces to the front, its 
 
120 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART IV. 
 
 chief will place himself two paces before its centre, 
 and cuiuumud : 
 
 1. Thii-d division, forioard. 2. Guide right. 3. 
 March. 
 
 528. At the third command, the division will march 
 towards the line of battle; the right guide will so di- 
 rect himself as to arrive by the side of the man on 
 the left of the eecoiid division, and when the division 
 is at three paces from ihe line of buttle, its chief will 
 halt it and align it by the right. 
 
 529. The chief of the fourth division will conform 
 himself (and the chief «tf the fifth, if there be a fifth) 
 to what has just been prescribed for the third. 
 
 530. The deployment, ended, the colonel will com- 
 mand : 
 
 Guides— FOSTS. 
 
 531. At this command, the guides will resume 
 their places in line of battle, and the markers will 
 retire. 
 
 532. If the column be in march, and the colonel 
 shall wish to deploy it on the first division without 
 halting the column, he will make the dis])ositions in- 
 dicated Nos. 512 and 513, and when the first division 
 shall have arrived at three paces from the line, he 
 will command : 
 
 1. On the first 'division, deploy column. 2. Battalion 
 by the left fiank. 3. March for double quick — 
 March.) 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART IV. lai^ 
 
 533. At the first command, the chief of the first 
 division will caution it to halt, and will command. 
 First division ; the other diiefs will caution their di- 
 visions to face by the left flank. 
 
 534. At the command march, briskly repeated by 
 the chiefs of the rear divisions, the cliief of the first 
 division will command Halt, and will alio^n his divi- 
 sioa by the right against the markers; the other di- 
 visions will face to the left, their chiefs hastening to 
 the left of their divisions. The second division will 
 conform its movements to ^'hat is prescribed Nos. 
 522 and following. The third and fourth divisions 
 will execute what is prescribed Nos. 526 and fallow- 
 ing; but the chief of each division will halt in his 
 own person at the command march given by the 
 chief of the divisitm which precedes him, and when 
 the right of his division arrives abreast of him, he 
 will command : 
 
 Such division, by the right flank — MARCH. 
 
 535. The lieutenant colonel will assure the position 
 of the guides, conforming to what is prescribed No. 
 431. The major will follow the movement abreast 
 with the fourth division. 
 
 536. If the colonel shall wish to deploy the column 
 without halting it, and to continue the march, the 
 markers will not be. posted; the movement will be 
 executed by the same commands and the same means 
 as the foregoing, but with the following modifica- 
 tions: 
 
 537. At the first command, the chief of the first 
 division will command, 1. Guide right. 2, Quick 
 time. At the command, Double (jmck — March, given 
 
.J 22 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART IV. 
 
 by the colonel, the first division will march in quick 
 time and will take the touch of elbows to the right; 
 the captains will iJuce themselves on the right of 
 their respective companies; the captain on the right 
 of the battalion will take points ou the ground Ut as- 
 sure the direction of the march. The chief of the 
 second division will allow his division to file past 
 him, and when he sees its right abreast of hini, he 
 will command, 1. Second division, by the right flank. 
 2. MAiiCH. 3. Giti^/c r>■o■/i^ and when this division shidl 
 arrive on the alignment of the first, he will cause it 
 to march in quick time. The third and fourth divi- 
 sions will deploy according to the same principles as 
 the second. 
 
 538. The colonel, lieutenant colonel, major, and co- 
 lor-bearer will conform themselves to what is pre- 
 scribed No. 458. 
 
 539. The cohmel will see, pending the movement, 
 that the principles just prescribed are duly obsei-ved, 
 and particularly that the division, in deploying, be 
 not halted too soon or too late. He will correct 
 promptly and quickly the faults that may be commit- 
 ted, and prevent their propagation. This rule is gen- 
 eral for all deployments. 
 
 540. The column being at a halt, if, instead of- de- 
 ploying it on the first, the colonel shall wish to deploy 
 it ou the rearmost division, he will cause the disposi- 
 tions to be made indicated No. 511 and following; 
 but it will be the right general guide whom he will 
 send to pLice himself beyond the point at which the 
 right of the battalion will rest when deployed. 
 
 54J.* The colonel will then command : 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART IV. 123 
 
 1. On the fourth (or such) divisioiy deploy column. 
 2. Battalion, right — Face. 
 
 542. At the first conmiand, the chief of the fourth 
 division will caution it to stand fast; the chiefs of the 
 
 'other divisions will caution them that they will have 
 to face to the right. 
 
 543. At the second command,- the first three divi- 
 sions will face to the right; and the ch-ief <!f each 
 will place himself by the side of its right guide. 
 
 544. At the same command, the lieutenant colonel 
 will place a third marker between the first two, so 
 that this marker may be o])posite to one of the 
 three right files of the left company of the division; 
 the lieutenant colonel will then place himself in the 
 line of battle a few paces beyond the point at which 
 the right of the third division will rest when de- 
 ployed. 
 
 545. The colonel will then command: 
 
 3. March (or douhle quick— ^Iarch.) 
 
 546. At this command, the three right divisions will 
 put themselves in march, the guide of the first so di- 
 
 i reeting himself as to pass three paces within the line 
 marked by the right general guide. The chief of the 
 third division will not follow its nioven^ent ; he will 
 see it file past, halt it when its left guide shall be 
 abreast with him, and cause it to face to the front; 
 
 Sand, if there be openings between the files, he will 
 cause them to be proniptly closed to the left. 
 
124 SCHOOL OF TEIE BATTALF N— PART IV. 
 
 547. The chi^f of the fourth division, when he sees 
 it nearly unmasked by the three others, will com- 
 mand: 
 
 ]. Fourth division, foricrad. 2. Guide left. 
 3. March 
 
 548. At the commind march, which will be given 
 the instant the fourth is unmasked, this division will 
 approach the line of battle, and when at three paces 
 from the markers on that line, its chief will halt it, 
 and command : 
 
 Lf/<— Dress. 
 
 549. At this command, the divisiou will dress for- 
 ward against the markers; the chief of the division 
 and the junior captain will each align the compitny on 
 his' right, and then command: 
 
 Front. 
 
 550. TJre instant that the third division is unmask- 
 ed, its chief will cause it to approach the line of bat- 
 tle, and halt it in the manner just prescribed for the 
 fourth. 
 
 551. The moment the division halts, its right guide 
 and the covering sergeant of its left company will step 
 on the line of battle, placing themselves on the pro- 
 longation of the markers established in front of the 
 fourth division; as so(m as they shall be assured in 
 their positions, the division wiH be aligned as has just 
 been prescribed for the fourth. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART IV. 125 
 
 552. The second and first divisions which will have 
 continued to march, will, in succession, be halted and 
 aligned by the left, in the same manner as the third ; 
 the chiefs of these divisions will conform themselves 
 to what is prescribed, No. 526. The second being 
 near the line of battle, the command will not be giv- 
 en for ij; to move on this line, but it will be dressed 
 up to it. 
 
 553 The deployment ended, the colonel will com- 
 mand : 
 
 ' Guides— FosTS. 
 
 554. At this command, the ehieti? of division and 
 the guides will resume their places in line of battle, 
 and the markers will retire. 
 
 555. The lieutenant colonel will assure the posi- 
 tions of the guides by the means indicated. No. 431, 
 and the major will follow the movement abreast with 
 the fourth division. 
 
 556. If the column be in march, and the colonel 
 shall wish to deploy it on the fbiu-th division, he will 
 make the dispositions indicated-, No. 511 and follow- 
 ing ; and when the head of the column shall arrive 
 within three paces of the line, he will command : 
 
 1, On the fourth division, deploy column. 2. Battal- 
 ion, by the right flank. 3. March (or double quick 
 — March.) 
 
 557. ,At the first command, the chief of the fourth 
 division will caution it to halt, and will command, 
 Fourth division ; the'chiefs of the other divisions will 
 caution their divisions to face to the right. 
 
126 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART JV. 
 
 558. At the comin;iiKl march, briskly repeated by 
 the chiefs of the tirst three divisions, the chief of the 
 fourth will cornmaiid : Halt. The first three divi- 
 situis will face to the riglit, and be directed parallelly 
 to ,the line of battle. Tlie chief of each of these 
 divisions wi 1 place himself by the side of its right 
 guide. The chief of the third division will see his 
 division tile past him, and when his left guide is 
 abreast of him, he will halt it, and face it to the 
 front. The chief of the fourth division, when he 
 shall see it nearly unmasked, will command: 1. 
 Fourth division forward ; 2. Guide left ; 3. March 
 for double quick — Makch.J This division will move 
 towards the line of battle, and when at three paces 
 from this line, it will be halted by its chief, and align- 
 ed by the left. 
 
 559. The chief of the third divi.non will move his 
 division forward, conforming to what has just been 
 prescribed for the fourth. 
 
 560. The chiefs of the second and first divisioYis, 
 after halting their divisions, will conform to what is 
 prescribed. No. 552. 
 
 561. If the colonel should wish to d'Cploy on the 
 fourth division, without halting the column, and to 
 continue to iiiurch forward, he will not have markers 
 posted, and the movement wiH be executed by the 
 same commands and the same means, with the tullow- 
 ing modifications ; the fourth division, when un- 
 Kasked, will be moved forward in quick time, and 
 will continue to march, instead of being halted, and 
 will take the touch of elbov\>s to the left. The third 
 division, on being unmasked, will be moved to the 
 front in double quick time, but when it arrives on the 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART IV. 127 
 
 alijjnmeiit of the fourth it will take the quick step, 
 and dress to the left until the command Guide centre, 
 is given by the colonel The chiefs of the second and 
 first divisions will conform to what has been prescrib- 
 ed for the third. When the first division phuU arrive 
 on the line, the colonel nuiy cause the battalion to 
 take the double quick step. 
 
 562. The colonel and lieutenant colonel will con- 
 form to what has been prescribed, Nos. 458 and 
 459. 
 
 i'>()3. To deploy the column on an interior division, 
 the colonel will cause the line to be traced by the 
 means above indicated, and the general guides will 
 move briskly on the liriC, as prescribed Ntis. 513 and 
 540. This being executed, the colonel will coul- 
 maud : 
 
 1. On such division, deploy column. 2. Battalion 
 outwards — FACE. 3. MARCH (or double quick — 
 March.) 
 
 564. Whether the column be with the right or left 
 in front, the divisions which, in the order in battle, 
 bel(»ng to the right of the directing one, will fitce to 
 the right; the others, except the directing division, 
 will face to the left ; the divisions in front of the latter 
 will deploy by the means indicated, No. 542, and fol- 
 lowing ; those in its rear will deploy as is prescribed, 
 No. 513, and following. 
 
 565". The directing division, the instant it finds it- 
 self unmasked, will approach the line of battle, taking 
 
128 SCHOOL OF THE B;VTTA LION— PART IV. 
 
 the guide left or right, according as the right or left 
 of the eoliiiiin inaj' be iu fr^nt. The chief of this di- 
 vision will align it by the directing flank, and then 
 step back into the rear, in order uiouieutarily to give 
 place to the chief of the next for aligning the next 
 division. 
 
 566. The lieutenant colonel will assure the positions 
 of the guides of divisions, wliich in the line of battle, 
 take the. right of the directing division, and the 
 major will assure the positions of the other guides. 
 
 567. If the column be in inarch, the colonel will 
 command : 
 
 1. On such division, deploy column. 2. Battalion, 
 hj the right and left Jlanks. 3. MARCH Cor dou- 
 ble quick — March.) 
 
 568. The divisions v/hich are iu front of the direc 
 ingone will deploy by the means indicated, Nos. 557, 
 and following ; those iu rear, as prescribed, No. 5'33, 
 and following. 
 
 569. The directing division, when unmasked, will 
 conform to what is prescribed for the fourth division, 
 
 No. 558. 
 
 570. The colonel, lieutenant colonel and major will ' 
 conform to what has been prescribed, Nos. 458 and 
 459. 
 
 571. In a column, left in front, deployments will be 
 executed according to the same principles, and by in- 
 verse means. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART IV. 129 
 Remarks on the deployment of columns, closed in 
 
 572. All the divisions ought to deploy rectangularly, 
 to march off abreast, and to preserve their distances 
 towards the line of battle. 
 
 573. Each division, the instant that it is unmasked, 
 ought to be marched towards the line of battle, and 
 to be aligned upon it by the flank next to the direct- 
 ing division ; the latt^, whether the right or left be 
 in front, will always be aligned by the ^ank next to 
 the point of appui, when the deploj'inent is made on 
 the first or last division ; but if the column be de- 
 ployed on an interior division, this division will be 
 aligned by the flank which was that of direction. 
 
 574. The chiefs of division will see that, in deploy- 
 ing, the principles prescribed for marching by the 
 flank are well observed, and if openings between the 
 files occur, which ought not to happen except on bro 
 ken or difficult grounds, the openings ought to be 
 promptly closed towards the directing flank as soon 
 as the divisions face to the front, 
 
 575. If a chief of divisioa give the command halt, 
 or the command, by the right or left flank, too soon or 
 too late, his division will be obliged to oblique to 
 the right or left in approaching the line of battle, and 
 his fault may lead the following subdivision into 
 error. 
 
 576. In the divisions which deploy by the left flank, 
 it is always the left guide of each company who ought 
 to pliice himself on the line of battle, to mark the 
 
 9* 
 
130 SCHOOL OF TOE BATTALION— PART IV. 
 
 diriection ; in divisions vv'hich 'deploy by the right 
 flank, it is the riglit guide. 
 
 577. A column by company, ch)sed in mass, may 
 be formed to the left or to the right into line, in the 
 same mnnner as a column at halfdistnnce, and by the 
 means indicated, No. 502, and following. ^ 
 
 578. A column by company, closed in mass, may 
 be formed on the right or on the left into line of 
 battle, as a column at half distance ; but in order to 
 execute this movement, without arresting the march 
 of the column, it is necessary that the guides avoid, 
 with the greatest care, shortening the step in turning, 
 and that the men near them, respectively, conform 
 themselves rapidly to the movements of their guides. 
 
 Remarks on inversions. 
 
 579. Inversions giving frequently the means of 
 forming line of battle, in the promptest manner, 
 are of great utility in the movements of an army. 
 
 580. The application that may be made of inver- 
 sions in the foimations to the right and to the left in 
 line of battle, has been indicated. No. 407, and follow- 
 ing. They may also be advantageously employed in 
 the successive formations, except in that of faced to 
 the rear, into line of battle. 
 
 581. Formations, by inversion, will be executed ac- 
 cording to tiie same principles as formations in the 
 direct order: but the colonel's first command will 
 always begin by inversion, 
 
 582. The battalion being in line of battle by inver-. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART IV. 131 
 
 sion, when the colonel shall wish, by forming it into 
 column, to bring it back to the direct order, he will 
 cause it either to break or to ploy hy company, or 
 by division, accordingly as the column may have been 
 by company or by division before it had been formed 
 .into line of battle by inversion. 
 
 583. When a battalion in line of battle, formed by 
 inversion, has to be deployed into column, the move- 
 ment will be executed according tCt the same princi- 
 ples as if the line were in the direct order, but ob- 
 serving what follows. 
 
 584. If it be intended that the column shall be by 
 division, with the first in front, or by company, with 
 the first company in front, the colonel will announce 
 in. the second command — left in front, heenuse the 
 battalion being in line of battle by inversion, that sub- 
 division is on the left. 
 
 585. Each chief whose subdivision takes position 
 in the column in front of the directing one, will con- 
 duct his subdivision till it halts ; and each chief whose 
 subdivision takes position in rear of the directing one, 
 will halt in his own person when up with t^e pre- 
 ceding right guide, and see his subdivision file past; 
 and each chief will align his subdivision by the right. 
 When the column is to be put in march, the second" 
 command will be — guide left, because the proper 
 right is in front. 
 
 586. For the same reason, if it be intended thai 
 the last subdivision shall be in front, right in front, 
 will be announced in the second command ; the sub- 
 divisions will be aligned by the left, and to put the 
 
13-2 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 
 
 column in march, .the second command will be, guide 
 right, because the proper left is in front. 
 
 PART FIFTH. 
 Article First. 
 
 To advance in line of battle. 
 
 587. The battalion being correctly aligned, and 
 supposed to be the directing one, when the colonel 
 shall wish to marcJi in line of battle, he will give the 
 lieutenant colonel an intimation of his purpose, place 
 himself about forty paces in rear of the color-file aud 
 face to the front. 
 
 588. The lieutenant colonel wil place himself a like 
 distance in front of the same file, and face to the 
 colonel, who will establish him as correctly as pos- 
 sible, by signal of the sword, perpendicularly to the 
 line of battle opposite to the color-bearer. The co- 
 lonel will next, above the heads of the lieutenant 
 colonel and color-bearer, take a point of direction in 
 the field beyond, if a distinct one present itself, ex- 
 actly in the prolongation of those first two points. 
 
 589. The colonel will then move twenty paces far- 
 ther to the rear, and establish two markers on the 
 prolongation of the straight line passing through the 
 color-bearer and the lieutenant colonel ; these markers 
 will face to the rear, the first placed about twenty- 
 five paces behind the rear rank of the battalion, and 
 the second at the same distance from the first. 
 
RT V. 133 
 
 icted to lake, 
 il be establish- 
 
 the ground iu 
 limseif, would 
 r ; the first of 
 
 twenty paces 
 
 le, the colonel 
 
 t)lor-guard will 
 rporals .in the 
 front rank, and 
 •ank of file clo- 
 ral guides will 
 lor-bearer, the 
 in of the ri^ht 
 sergeant who 
 
 will shift, pass- 
 :)f their respec- 
 ft of thebattal- 
 The covering 
 >ft of thecolor- 
 
 issured the col- 
 
 and the corpo- 
 
 ;ank, will go to 
 
 indicated, No. 
 
132 SCHOOL 
 
 column in marcl 
 right, because tl 
 
 To 
 
 587. The bat; 
 supposed to be tl 
 shall wish to mai 
 lieutenant colone 
 
 himself about fori m 
 
 face to the front. M 
 
 5S3. The lieute ' , " 
 
 distance in front -: — ^-^ °^ 
 
 colonel, who will 
 
 sible, by signal of 
 
 line of battle oppi 
 
 lonel will next, a 
 
 colonel and color-l 
 
 the field beyond, i I 
 
 actly in the prolan ♦ i 
 
 589. The colone 
 ther to the rear, i 
 prolongation of the 
 color-bearer and th 
 will face to the re; 
 five paces behind t 
 the second at the s 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 133 
 
 590. The color-bearer will be instructed to take, 
 the moment the lieutenant colonel shall be establish- 
 ed on the perpendicular, two points ou the ground iu 
 the straight Hue which, drawn from himself, would 
 pass between the heels of that officer ; the first of 
 these points will be taken at fifteen or twenty paces 
 from the color-bearer. • 
 
 591. These dispositions being made, the colonel 
 will command : 
 
 1. Battalion, foricard. 
 
 ^92. At this, the front rank of the color-guard will 
 advance six paces to the front ; the corporals -in the 
 rear rank will place themselves in the front rank, and 
 these will be replaced by those iu the rank of file clo- 
 sers ; at the same time the two geueral guides will 
 move in advance, abreast with the color-bearer, the 
 one on the right, opposite to the captain of the ri^bt 
 company, the other opposite to the sergeant who 
 closes the left of the battalion. 
 
 593. The captains of the left wing will shift, pass- 
 ing before the front rank, to the left of tbeir respec- 
 tive companies ; the sergeant on the left of the battal- 
 ion will step back into the rear rank. The covering 
 sergeant of the company next on the left of thecoJor- 
 company, will step into the front rank. 
 
 594. The lieutenant colonel having assured the col- 
 or-bearer on the line between himself and the corpo- 
 ral of the color-file, now in the front rank, will go to 
 the position which will be hereinafter indicated. No. 
 602. 
 
1^4 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 
 
 595. The major will place himself six or eight paces 
 on either flank of the color-ruuk. 
 
 596. The colonel will then command : 
 
 2. March (or double quick — March). 
 
 597. At this command, the battalion will step oiF 
 with life ; the color-bearer, charged with the step and 
 direction, will s(jrnpulously ob!>erve the length and 
 cadence of the pace, ir arching on the prolongation of 
 the two pcints previously taken, and successively tak- 
 ing others in advance by the means indicated in the 
 school of the conipany; the corporal on his right, and 
 the one on his left, will march in the same step, tak- 
 ing care not to turn the he id or shoulders, the color- 
 bearer supporting the color lance against the hip. 
 
 598. The two gerjci-al guides will march in the 
 same step with the color-rank, each maintaining him- 
 self-abreast, or nearly so, with that rank, and neither 
 occupying himself with the movement of the other. 
 
 599. The three corporals of the color-guard, now 
 in the front rank of the battalion, will march well 
 aligned, elbow to elbow, heads direct to the front, 
 and without deranging the line of their shoulders ; 
 the centre one will follow exactly in the trace of the 
 color-bearer, and maintain the same step, without 
 lengthening or shortening it, except on an intimation 
 from the colonel or lieutenant colonel, although he 
 should find himself more or less than six paces from 
 the cok»r-rank. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V 135 
 
 600. The covering sergeant in the front rank be- 
 tween the color company and the next on the left, 
 will march elbow to elbow, and ou the same line, with 
 the three corporals in the centre, his head well to the 
 front. 
 
 COJ . The captains of the color company, and the 
 company next to the left, will constitute, with the 
 three eor[)orals in the centre of the front rank, the 
 basis of alignment for both wings of the battalion; 
 they will march in the same step with the color-bear- 
 er, and exert themselves to maintain their shoulders 
 exactly in the square with the direction. To this end, 
 they will keep their heads direct to the front, only 
 occasionally casting an eye on the three centre cor- 
 porals, with the slightest possible turn of the neck, 
 and if they perceive themselves in advance, or in rear 
 of these corporals, the captain, or two captains, will 
 almost insensibly shorten or lengthen the step, so as, 
 at the end of several paces, to regain the ti-ue align- 
 ment, without giving sudden checks or impulsions to 
 the wings beyond them respectively. 
 
 602. The lieutenant colonel, placed twelve or fif- 
 teen paces on the right of the captain of the color- 
 company, will maintain this captain and the next one 
 beyond, abreast with the three centre corporals ; to 
 this end, he will caution either to lengthen or to short- 
 en the step as may be necessary, which the captain, or 
 two captains, will execute as has just been explained. 
 
 603. All the other captains will maintain them- 
 selves on the prcdongation of this basis ; and, to this 
 end, they will cast their eyes towards the centre, tak- 
 
136 • SCHOOL OF THE BAIT'A LION— PART V. 
 
 ing cave to turn the neck but gliofhtly, and not to de- 
 range the direction of their shoulder. 
 
 604: The captains will observe the march of their 
 companies, and prevent the men from getting in ad- 
 vance of the line of captains; they will not lengthen 
 or shorten step except when evidently necessary ; be- 
 cause, to correct, with too scrupulous attention, small 
 faults, is apt to cause the production of greater — loss 
 of calmness, silence, and equality of step, each of, 
 which it is so important to maintain. 
 
 605. The men will constantly keep their heads well 
 directed to the front, feel lightly the elbow towards 
 the centre, resist pressure coming from the flank, 
 give the greatest attention to the squareness (»f should- 
 ers, and hold themselves always very slightly behind 
 the line of the captains, in order never to shut out 
 from the view of the latter the basis*of alignment ; 
 they will, from time to time, cast an eye on the col- 
 or-rank, or on the general guide of the wing, in order 
 to march constantly in the same step with those ad- 
 vanced persons. 
 
 60G. Pending the march, the line determined by 
 the two markers (h and d) will be prolonged by plac- 
 ing, in proportion as the battalion advances, a third 
 mai-ker (i) in the rear of the fii'st (h), then the mark- 
 er (d) will quit his place and go a like distance in 
 rear of (i); the marker (h) will, in his turn, do the 
 like in respect to (d), and so on, in sucqessiou, as 
 long as the battalion continues to advance; each 
 marker, on shifting position,* taking care to face to 
 the rear, and to cover accurately the two markers al- 
 ready established on the direction. A staif officer, 
 or the quartermaster sergeant, designated for the 
 
jly fifteen 
 from the 
 1 to shift 
 ?hind the 
 
 self about 
 t)attalion, 
 markers, 
 :alion, or 
 617 and 
 )r-bearer 
 lud : 
 
 5teu thir- 
 nk, halt, 
 direction 
 e sword; 
 will then 
 Tom the 
 e should- 
 conform 
 
 self upon 
 , the ma- 
 e to the 
 the cor- 
 len take 
 
ROT] 
 
 M.il- 
 
 I 
 ino- care tc I } 
 
 range the | ! 
 
 604: Th> ^. 
 
 companies . 
 
 vance of tl I 
 
 or shorten j 
 
 cause, to c i 
 
 faults, is a , | 
 
 of calmnes j 
 which it is 
 
 605. Th 
 directed t( 
 the centre 
 give the gi 
 ers, and h( 
 the line ol 
 from the ^ 
 they will, 
 or-rank, oi 
 to march ( 
 vanced pe 
 
 606. Pe 
 the twf» m 
 iug, in pro 
 marker (i 
 er (rf) wi] 
 rear of (i 
 like in re.' 
 long as th 
 marker, o 
 the rear, i 
 ready esta 
 or the qi 
 
SCHOOL OF TOE BATTALION- PART V. 137 
 
 purpose, and who will hold himself constantly fifteen 
 or twenty paces fiicing the marker farthest from the 
 battalion, will caution each marker when to shift 
 place, and assure him on the direction behind the 
 other two. 
 
 607. The colonel will habitually hold himself about 
 thirty paces in rear of the centre of his battalion, 
 taking care not to put himself on the line of markers, 
 if, for example, by the slanting of the battalion, or 
 the indications which will be given, Nos. 617 and 
 following, he finds that the march of the color-bearer 
 is not perpendicular, he will promptly command : 
 
 Point of direction to the right for left). 
 
 608. At this command, v|;he major will hasten thir- 
 ty or forty paces in advance of the color-rank, halt, 
 face to the colonel, and place himself on the direction 
 which the latter will indicate by signal of the sword; 
 the corporal in the centre of the battalion will then 
 dii-ect himself upon the major, on a caution from the 
 colonel, advancing, to that end, the opposite should- 
 er ; the corporals on his right and left will conform 
 themselves to his direction. 
 
 609. The color-bearer will also direct himself upon 
 the major, advancing the opposite shoulder, the ma- 
 jor causing him, at the same time, to incline to the 
 right or left, until he shall exactly cover the cor- 
 poral of his file ; the color-bearer will then take 
 points on the ground in this ne^ direction. 
 
138 SCHOOL OF THK BATTALION— PART V. 
 
 610. The two general guides will coiiftn'in them- 
 selves to the new direction of the color-rank. 
 
 611. The officer charged with observing the suc- 
 ces^sive replacing of the markers in the rear of the 
 centre, will establish them promptly on the new di- 
 rection, taking for basis the color-bearer and the 
 corporal of his file in the centre of the battalion; 
 the colonel will verify thi3 new direction of the 
 markers. 
 
 612. The lieutenant colonel, from the position giv- 
 en, No. 602, will see that the two centre companies, 
 and successively all the others, conform themselves to 
 the new direction of the ceiiti-e, but without precip- 
 itancy or disorder ; he will then endeavor to maintain 
 that basis of alignment for the battalion, perpendic- 
 ularly to the direction pursued by the color bearer. 
 
 613. He will often observe the march of the two 
 wings; and, if he discover that the cap'tains neglect 
 to conform themselves to the basis of alignment, he 
 will recall their attention. by the command — captain 
 of (such) company, or captains o/(such) companies, 
 on the line — without, however, endeavoring too 
 scrupulously to correct small faults. 
 
 614. The mnjor on the flmk of the color-rank will, 
 during the march, place himself, from ti\ne to time, 
 twenty paces in front of that "rank, face to the rear, 
 and place himself correctly on the pndotigation of 
 the marktM-s established behind the centre, in order 
 to verity the exact march cf the color-bearer on that 
 line ; he will rectify, if necessary, the direction of the 
 color-bearer, who will immediately take two new 
 
619. If openings bo f(»rmed, if the files crowd 
 !a.eh other if, in short, disorder ensue, the remedy 
 )ught to be applied as promptly as possible, but 
 
m 
 
 I 
 
 ^KSM^nSSSMMSSSimmE^. 
 
 teiiifiifissteaMiiiBi 
 
 
 li> 
 
 3ZZZIIS 
 
 x^_ H' he: 
 
 s 2 y, ""izirzzzi::" 
 
 Lij * ; t 
 
 V 
 
 ^4-^^ 
 
 i - 1 . 
 
 ! at.- \ 
 
 4 
 
 m 
 
 1 ' • .■■.--. .-: 
 
 
 .- .--£,^_: — ^ . 
 
 
 -»■ 
 
 ^•-^.^- 
 
 a(ffliiiiiiiMaj''is»iiHffii 
 
 -r-— T ~*r*. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 139 
 
 points on the ground between liimself and the ma- 
 jor. 
 
 615. All the principles applicable to the advance 
 in line, are the same for a subordinate as for the di- 
 recting battalion ; but when the battalion under in- 
 struction is supposed to be subordinate, no markers 
 will be placed behind its centre. 
 
 Remarks on the advance in line of battle. 
 
 616.' If, in the exercises of detail, or courses of ele- 
 mentary instruction, the officers, sergeants, corporals, 
 and men, have not been well confirmed in the princi- 
 ples of the position underarms, as well as in the length 
 and cadence of the step, the march of the battalion in 
 line will be floating, unsteady, and disunited. 
 
 617. If the color-bearer, instead of marching per- 
 pendicularly forward, pursue an oblique direction, 
 the battalion will slant ; crowdings in (uie wing, and 
 openings in the other, will follow, and these defects 
 in the march, becoming more and more embarrassing 
 in proportion to the deviation from the perpendicular, 
 will commence near the centre. 
 
 6iy. It is then of the greatest importance that the 
 color-bearer should direct himself perpendicularly 
 forwai'd, and that the basis of alignment sh(»uld al- 
 ways be perpendicular to the line pursued by him. 
 
 619. If openings be formed, if the files crowd 
 ea«h other, if, in short, disorder ensue, the remedy 
 ought to be applied as promptly as possible, but 
 
140 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 
 
 calmly, with few words, and as little noise as practi- 
 cable. 
 
 620. The object of the general guides, in the march 
 in line of battle is, to indicate to the companies near 
 the flanks the step of the centre of the battalion, and 
 to afford more facility in establishing the wings on the 
 direction of the centre if they should betoo much in 
 the rear; hence the necessity that these guides should 
 maintain the same step, and march abreast, wr very 
 nearly so, with the color-rank, which it will be easy 
 for them to do by casting from time to time an eye on 
 that rank. 
 
 621. If the battalion happen to lose the step, the 
 colonel will recall its attention by the command, to 
 the — Step ; captains and their companies will im- 
 mediately cast an eye on the color-rank, or one of 
 the general guides, and promptly conform themselves 
 to the step. 
 
 622. Finally, it is of the utmost importance to the 
 attainment of regularity in the march in line of bat- 
 tle, to habituate the battalion to execute with as much 
 order as promptness the inovements prescribed No. 
 607 and following, for rectifying the direction ; it is 
 not less essential that commanders of biittalions 
 should exercise themselves, with the greatest care, 
 in forming their own coup iVocil in order to be able 
 to judge with precision the direction to be given to 
 their battalions. 
 
school of tfie battalion -part v. 141 
 Article Second. 
 
 Oblique march in line of battle. 
 
 623. The battalion marching in line of battle, when 
 the colonel shall wish to canse it to oblique, he will 
 command : 
 
 1. Right (or left) oblique. 2. March (or double 
 
 quick — March ). 
 
 624. At the first command, the major will place 
 himself in front of, and faced to the color-bearer. 
 
 625. At the command march, the' whole battalion 
 will take the oblique stop. The companies and cap- 
 tains will strictly observe the principles established 
 in the school of the company. 
 
 626. The major in front of the color-bearer ought 
 to maintain the latter in a line with the centre cor- 
 poral, so that the color-bearer may oblique neither 
 more nor less than that corporal. He will carefully 
 observe also that they follow parallel directions and 
 preserve the same length of step. 
 
 627. The lieutenant colonel will take care that the 
 captains and the three corporals in the centre keep 
 exactly on a line and follow parallel directions. 
 
 628. The colonel will see that the battalion pre- 
 serves its parallelism; he will exert himself to pre- 
 vent the files from opening or crowding. If he per- 
 ceive the latter fault, he will cause the files on the 
 flank, -to which the battalion obliques, to open out. 
 
142 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 
 
 629. The colonel, wishing the direct march to be 
 resumed, will command : 
 
 1. Foricard. 2. March. 
 
 630. At the command march, the battalion will re- 
 sume the direct march. The major will place himself 
 thirty paces in front of the color-bearer, and face to 
 the colonel, who will establish him, by a signal of 
 the swonl, on the direction wliich the coloj- bearer 
 ought to pursue. The latter will immediately take 
 two points on the ground between himself and the 
 major. 
 
 631. In resuming the direct march, care will be 
 taken that the men do not close the intervals which 
 may exist between the files at once ; it should be done 
 almost insensibly. 
 
 Remarks on the oblique march. 
 
 632. The object of the oblique step is to gain ground 
 to the rigbt or left, preserving all the while the prim- 
 itive direction of the line of battle ; as thus, for ex- 
 ample: the battalion, departing from the line (sz), 
 arrives on the line (xz) parallel to (sz). 
 
 633. It is then essential that the corporals in the 
 centre of the battalion, and the captains of compa- 
 nies, should follow parallel directions, and maintain 
 themselves at the same height; without which they 
 will give a false direction to the battaiion. 
 
 634. The colonel and lieutenant colonel will exert 
 themselves to prevent the files from crowding ; for, 
 without such precaution, the oblique march cannot be 
 executed* with facility. 
 
sen ):'L OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 143 
 
 Article Third. 
 
 To halt the battalion, marching in line of battle, and 
 to align it. 
 
 635. The battalion marching in the line of battle, 
 when the colonel shall wish to halt it, he will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. Battalion. 2. Halt. 
 
 636. At the second command, the battalion will 
 halt; the color-rank and general guides will remain 
 in front ; but if the colonel should not wish immedi- 
 ately to resume the advance in line, nor to give a gen- 
 eral alignment, he will command : 
 
 Color and general guides — POSTS. 
 
 637. At this command, the color-rank and general 
 guides will retake their places in line of battle, the 
 captains in the left wing will shift to the right of their 
 companies. 
 
 638. If the colonel should then judge it necessary 
 to rectify the alignment, he will command : 
 
 Captains, rectify the alignment. 
 
 639. The captains will immediately cast an eye 
 towards the centre, align themselves accurately, on 
 the basis of the alignment, which the lieutenant col- 
 onel will see well directed, and then promptly dress 
 their respective companies. The lieutenant colonel 
 
144 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 
 
 will adiuoiiish such captains as may not be accurate- 
 ly on the aligiuuent by the command: Captain of 
 (such) company, or captains of fsucii) companies, 
 move up or fail back. 
 
 640. But when the colonel shall wish to give the 
 battalion a general alignment, either parallel or ob- 
 lique, instead of rectilyiug it as above, he will move 
 some jtaces outside of one of the general guides (the 
 right will here be supposed) and caution the right 
 general guide and the color-bearer to face him, and 
 then establish them by signal of the sword, on the 
 direction which he may wish to give to the battalion. 
 As soon as they shall be correctly established, the left 
 general guide will place himself on their direction, 
 and be assured in his position by the major. The col- 
 or-bearer will carry the color-lance perpendicularly 
 between his eyes, and the two corporals of his rank 
 will return to their places in the front rank the mo- 
 ment he shall face to the colonel. 
 
 641. This disposition being made, the colonel will 
 command : 
 
 J, 1. Guides — On the Line. 
 
 642. At this command, the right guide of each com- 
 pany in the right wing, and the left guide of each 
 company in the left, will each place himself on the 
 direction of the color-bearer and the two general guides, 
 face to the color-bearer, place himself in rear of the 
 guide who is next before him at a distance equal to 
 the front of his company, and align himself upon the 
 color-bearer and the general guide beyond. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION-PART V. 3 45 
 
 643. The captains m the right wing will shift to 
 the left of their couipanies, except the captain of the 
 color-company, wlio will remain on its right, but step 
 into the rear rank ; the captains in the left wing will 
 shift to the right of their companies. « 
 
 644 The lieutenant colonel will promptly rectify, 
 if necessary, the positions of the guides of the right 
 wing, and the major those of the other; which being 
 executed, the colonel will command: 
 
 2. On the centre— Dress. 
 
 645. At this command, the companies will move 
 up in quick time against the guides, where, having 
 arrived, each captain will align his company accord- 
 ing to prescribed principles, the lieutenant colonel 
 aligning the color-company. 
 
 646. If the alignment be oblique, the captains will 
 take care to conform their companies to it in con- 
 ducting them towards the line. 
 
 647. The battalion being aligned, the colonel will 
 command: 
 
 3. Color and guides — POSTS. 
 
 648. At this command, the color bearer, the gen- 
 eral and company guides, and the captains in the 
 right wing, will take'their places in the line of battle, 
 and the color-bearer will replace the heel of the 
 color-lance against the right hip. 
 
 640. If the new direction of the line of battle be 
 such that one or more companies find themselves in 
 advance of that line, the colonel, before establishing 
 ^he general guides on the line, will" cause such com- 
 
14G SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION PART V 
 
 panies to be moved to the rear, either by the back 
 step, or by first facing about, according as thtre may 
 be less or more ground to be repassed to bring the 
 companies in rear of the new direction. 
 
 650. When the colonel shall wish to give a general 
 alignment, and the color and general guides are not 
 on the line, he will cause them to move out by the 
 command : 
 
 J. Color and general guides — On THE LiNE. 
 
 651. At this command, "the color-bearer and the 
 general guides will place themselves on the line, con- 
 forming to what is prescribed, No. 640. 
 
 Article Fourth. 
 
 Change of direction in marching in line of battle. 
 
 652. The battalion marching in line of battle, 
 when the colonel shall wish it to change direction to 
 the right, he will command : 
 
 ]. Change direction to the right. 2. March (or 
 
 double quick — MARCH.) 
 
 653. At the command march, the movement will 
 commence ; the color-rank will shorten the step to 
 fourteen or seventeen inches,, and direct itself circu- 
 larly to the right, taking care to advance the loft 
 shoulder, but only insensibly; the major will place 
 himself before the color-bearer, facing him, and so 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION-PART V. 147 
 
 direct his march that he may describe an arc of a 
 circle neither too hirge nor too small ; he will also 
 see that the color-bearer takes steps, of fourteen or 
 seventeen inches, according to the gait. 
 
 604. The right general guide will wheel on the 
 right captain of the battalion as his pivot; the left 
 general guide will circularly march in the step of 
 twenty-eight inches or thirty-three inches, according 
 to the gait, and will align himself upon the color- 
 bearer and the right general guide. 
 
 055. The corporal placed in the centre of the bat- 
 talion, will take steps of fourteen or seventeea 
 inches, and will wheel to the right by advancini; in- 
 sensibly the left shoulder ; the battalion will conform 
 itself to the movement of the centre; to this end, the 
 captain of the color-company, and the captain of the 
 next to the left, will attentively regulate their march, 
 as well as the direction of their shoulders, on the 
 three centre corporals. All the other captains will 
 regulate the directi(m of their shoulders and the 
 length of their step on this basis. 
 
 656. The men will redouble their attention in order 
 not to pass the line of captains. 
 
 657^ In the left wing the pace will be lengthened 
 in proportion as the file is distant from the centre; 
 the captain of the eighth company who closes the 
 left flank of the battalion will take steps of twenty 
 eight or thirty-three inches, according to the gait. 
 
 658. In the right wing the pace will be shortened 
 in proportion as the file is distant from the centre; 
 the captain who closes the right flank will only slowly 
 
148 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 
 
 turn in his person, observing to yield ground a little 
 if pushed. 
 
 651). The colonel will take great care to prevent 
 the centre of the battalion from describing an arc of 
 a circle, either too great or too small, in order that 
 the wings may conform themselves to its movement. 
 He will see also that the captains keep their com- 
 panies constantly aligned upon the centre, so that 
 there may be no opening and no crowding of files. 
 He will endeavor to prevent faults, and, should they 
 occur, correct them without noise. 
 
 C60. The lieutenant colonel, placed before the bat- 
 talion, will give his attention to the same object. 
 
 661. When the colonel shall wish the direct march 
 to be resumed, he will command : 
 
 1. Forward. 2. March 
 
 662. At the command march, the color-rank, the 
 general guides, and the battalion will resume the. 
 direct march ; the major will immediately place him- 
 self thirty or forty paces in front, face to the colonel, 
 placed in rear of the centre, who will establish him 
 by signal of the sword on the perpendicular direc- 
 tion which the corporal in the centre of the battalion 
 ought to pursue ; the major will inunediately cause 
 the color-bearer, if necessary, to incline to the right 
 or left, so as to be exactly opposite to his file; the 
 color-bearer will then take two points on the ground 
 between himself and the major. 
 
 663. The lieutenant colonel will endeavor to ^ive 
 
SCHOOL OF THP: battalion -part v. 149 
 
 to the color-company and the next on the left a direc- 
 tion perpendicular to that pursued by the centre 
 corporal ; and all the other companies, without pre- 
 cipitancy, will conform themselves to that basis. 
 
 Article Fifth. 
 To inarch in retreat, in line of battle. 
 
 664. The battalion being halted, if it be the wish 
 of the colonel to cause-it to march in retreat, he will 
 command: 
 
 1. Face to the rear. 2. Battalion, about — Face. 
 
 665. At the second command, the battalion will 
 face about; the color-rank, and ^the general guides, 
 if in advance, will take their places in line ; the col- 
 or-bearer will pass into the rear rank, now leading ; 
 the corporal of his file will step behind the corporal 
 next on his own right, to let the color-bearer pass, 
 and then step into the front rank, now rear, to re- 
 form the color-file; the colonel will place himself be- 
 hind the front rank, become the rear; the lieutenant 
 colonel and major will place themselves before the 
 rear rank, now leading. 
 
 666. The colonel will take post forty paces behind 
 the color-file, in order to assure the lieutenant colo- 
 nel on the perpendicular, who will place himself at a 
 like distance in front, as prescribed for the advance 
 in line of battle 
 
 667. If the battalion be the one charged with the 
 direction, the colonel will establish markers in the 
 
150 SCHOOL f F THE BATTALION— PART V. 
 
 manner indicated, No. 589, except that tliey will face 
 to the battalion, and that the first will be placed twen- 
 ty-five paces from the lieutenant colonel. If the mar- 
 kers be already established, the officer charged with 
 replacini? them in succession will cause them to face 
 about, the moment that the battalion executes this 
 movement, and then the marker nearest to the bat- 
 talion will hasten to the rear of the two others. 
 
 6G8. These dispositionsbeingmade, the colonel will 
 command : 
 
 3. Battalion, forirard. 
 
 669. At. this command, the color-bearer will ad- 
 vance six paces beyond the rank of file closers, ac- 
 companied by the two corporals of his guard of that 
 rank, the centre corporal stepping back to let the 
 color-bearer pass; the two file closers nearest this 
 centre corporal will unite on him bt hind the color- 
 guard to serve as a basis of alignment for the line of 
 file closers ; the two general guides will place them- 
 selves abreast with the color-rank, the covering ser- 
 geants will place themselves in the line of file closers, 
 and the captains in the rear rank, now leading; the 
 captains in the left wing, now^ right, will, if not al- 
 ready there, shift to the left of their companies now 
 become the right. 
 
 670. The colonel will then command : 
 
 4. March (or doiible quick— March.) 
 
 671. The battalion will march in retreat on the 
 same principles which govern the advance in line ; the 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 151 
 
 centre corporal behind the color-bearer will march 
 exactly in his trace. 
 
 672. If it be the directing battalion, the color-bear- 
 er will direct himself on "the markers, w^ho will, of 
 their own accord, each place himself in succession 
 behind the marker most distant, on being approached 
 by the battalion; the officer charged with the super-- 
 intendence of the markers, will carefully assure them 
 on tJie direction 
 
 67;?. In the case of a subordinate battalion, the 
 color-bearer will mainj:ain himself on the perpendicu- 
 lar by means of points taken on the ground. 
 
 674. The colonel, lieutenant colonel, and major will 
 each discharge the same functions as in the advance 
 in line. 
 
 675. The lieutenant colonel, placed on the outside 
 of the file closers of the color-company, will also 
 maintain the three file, closers of the basis of align- 
 ment in a square with the line of direction : the other 
 file closers will keep themselves aligned on this basis. 
 
 Article Sixth. 
 To halt the battalion marching in retreat, and to face 
 it to the front. 
 
 676. The colonel having halted the battalion, and 
 Wishing to face it to the front, will command : 
 
 ]. Face to llie front. 2. Battalion, about — Face. 
 
 677. At the second command, the color-rank, gene- 
 
15'2 SCHOOL OF TFIE BATTALION— PART V. 
 
 eral guides, captains, and covering sergeants, will all 
 retake their habitual places in line of battle, and the 
 color-bearer will repass into the front rank. 
 
 G78. The battalion marching in line of battle by 
 the front rank, when the colonel shall wish to march 
 it in retreat, he will command : 
 
 1. Battalion, right about. 2. MARCH. 
 
 679. At the command march, the battalion will face 
 to the rear and move off at the same gait by tlie rear 
 rank. The principles prescribed No. 6G9, andfollow- 
 
 -ing will be carefully observed". 
 
 680. If the colonel should wish the battalion to 
 >^ march again by the front, ho will give the same.cora- 
 
 mands. 
 
 Article Seventh. 
 
 Change of direction, in marching in retreat. 
 
 681. A battalion retiring in line will change direc- 
 tion by the connnands and means indicated No. 652 
 and following ; the three -file closers, united behind 
 the color rank, will conform themselves to the move- 
 ment of this I'ank, and wheel like it ; the centre file 
 closer of the three will take steps of fourteen or 
 seventeen inches, according to the gait, and keeji him- 
 self steadily at the same distance from the color- 
 bearer; the line of file closers will conform themselves 
 to the movement of its centre, and the lieutenant 
 colonel will maintain it on that basis. 
 
• I ui.wMii \i I ^""^^^'^fiti'^^^i^g'fmf 
 
 53 
 
obstacle only covers the third company, the colonel 
 will command : 
 
 Third company, obstacle. 
 
 68;3. At this command, the captain of the third 
 company will place himself in its front, turn to it, 
 and command, 1. Third company, by the left flank, to 
 the rear into column. 2. Double quick. 3. March. 
 He will then hasten to the left of his company. 
 
 6S4. At the command march, the company will 
 face to the left in marching; the two left files 
 will promptly disengage to the rear in double quick 
 time; the left gtiide placing himself at the head of the 
 front rank, will conduct it behind the fourth compa- 
 ny, directing himself parallelly with this company; 
 the captain of the third will himself halt opposite to 
 the captain of the fourth, and see his company file 
 past ; when its right file shall be nearly up with him, 
 he will command, I. Third company. 2. By the right 
 flank. 3. March. 4. Guide right, and place him- 
 self before the centre of his company. 
 
school of the hatt alton— part v. 153 
 Article Eighth. 
 
 Passage of obstacles, advancing and retreating. 
 
 682. The battaliim advancing in line will be sup- 
 posed to encounter an obstacle which covers one or 
 more companies ; the colonel will cause them to 
 ploy into column at full distance, in rear of the next 
 company towards the color, which will be executed 
 in the following manner. It will be supposed that the 
 obstacle only covers the third company, the colonel 
 will command : 
 
 Third company, obstacle. 
 
 683. At this command, the captain of the third 
 company will place himself in its front, turn to it, 
 and couunand, 1. Third company, by the left flank, to 
 the rear into column. 2. Double quick. 3. March. 
 He will then hasten to the left of his company. 
 
 6?4. At the command march, the company will 
 face to the left in marching; the two left files 
 will promptly disengage to the rear in double quick 
 time ; the left guide placing himself at the head of the 
 front rank, will conduct it behind the fourth compa- 
 ny, directing himself parallelly with this comj»any ; 
 the captain of the third will himself halt opposite to 
 the captain of the fourth, and see his company file 
 past ; when its right file shall be nearly up with him, 
 he will command, I. Third company. 2. By the right 
 flank. 3. March. 4. Guide right, and place him- 
 self before the centre of his company. 
 
154 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 
 
 685. At the command march, the company will face 
 to the right, preserving the same gait, but the mo- 
 ment it sliall be at the prescribed distance, its cap- 
 tain will command : 
 
 1. ^uick time. 2. MARCH. 
 
 686. This company will thus follow in column that 
 behind which it finds itself, and at wheeling distance, 
 its right guide marching exactly in the trace of the 
 captain of that company. 
 
 687. As soon as the third company shall have faced 
 to the left, the left guide of the second will place 
 himself on the left of the front rank of his company, 
 and maintain between himself and the right of the 
 fourth the space necessary for the return into line of 
 the third. 
 
 688. The obstacle being passed, the colonel will 
 command : 
 
 Third company, foricard into line. 
 
 689. At this command, the captain turning to his 
 company, will add : 
 
 1. By company, right half ichcel. 2. Double quick. 
 
 3. March. 
 
 690. At the command march, the company will 
 take the double quick step, and execute a half wheel ; 
 its captain will then command, ]. Forward. 2. 
 March. 3. Guide left. The second comn)and will 
 be given when the conipany shall have sufficiently 
 wheeled. 
 
'^■v 
 
 ••*♦ 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALKN— PART V. 155 
 
 691. At the command march, the company will 
 direct itself straight forward towards the line of bat- 
 tle, and retake its position in it according to the prin- 
 ciples prescribed for the formation forward into line 
 of battle. 
 
 692. It will be supposed that the obstacle corers 
 several contiguous companies (the three companies 
 on the right for example), the colonel will com- 
 mand: 
 
 1. Three right covipanics, obstacle. 2. By the left 
 flank, to the rear, into column. 3. Double quick — 
 March. 
 
 693. At the tirst command, the captains of the 
 designated companies will each place himself before 
 the centre of his company, and caution it as to the 
 movement about to be executed. 
 
 694. At the command march, the designated com- 
 panies will face to the left in marching, and imme- 
 diately take the double quick step ; each captain will 
 cause the head of his company to disengage itself to 
 the rear, and the left guide will place himself at the 
 head of the front rank ; the captain of the third com- 
 pany will conform himself to what is prescribed, No. 
 684 and followiiig; the captains of the other com- 
 panies will conduct them by the flank in rear of the 
 third, inclining towards the head of the colum.n ; and, 
 as the head of each company arrives opposite to the 
 right of the one next before it in column, its captain 
 will himself halt, see his company file past, and con , 
 form himself for facing it to the front, in marching, 
 to what is prescribed No. 684, and following. 
 
156 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 
 
 695. When the last company in column shall 
 have passed the obstacle, the colonel will com- 
 mand: 
 
 1. Three right companies, forward, into line. 
 
 696. At this command, the captain of each of these 
 three companies, .will command. By company, right 
 half tchcel. The colonel will then add : 
 
 1. Double quick. 2. MARCH. 
 
 697. At this, briskly repeated by the captains of 
 the three companies, each company will conform it- 
 self to what is prescribed No. 690 and following. 
 
 698. It is supposed, in the foregoing examples, 
 that the companies belonged to the right wing ; if 
 they make .part of the other, they will excute the 
 passage of an obstacle according to the same prin- 
 ciples and by inverse means. 
 
 699. When flank companies are broken off to pass 
 an obstacle, the general guide on that flank will place 
 himself six paces in front of the outer file of the near- 
 est company to him remaining in line. 
 
 700. In the preceding movements, it has been sup- 
 posed tbat the battalion was marching in quick time, 
 but if it be marching in double quick time, and the 
 colonel shall wish to cause several contiguous com- 
 panies to break to the rear, he will first" order the 
 battalion to march in quick time; the companies will 
 break as indicated No. 692. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 157 
 
 701, When the movement is completed, the colo- 
 nel will order the double quick step to be re^sumed. 
 He will also cause the battalion to march in quick 
 time when he shall wish to bring into line the several 
 companies which are to the rear in column ; the 
 movement will be executed as previously indicated ; 
 and when the last company shall have nearly comple- 
 ted its movement, the colonel will cause the double 
 quick step to be resumed. 
 
 702. In the movement of a single company, or of 
 several companies not contiguous to each other, the 
 battalion will continue to march in double quick 
 time, but in these cases the companies which are to 
 ploy into column, or re-enter the Hue, will increase 
 the gait. 
 
 703. In the march in -retreat, these several move- 
 ments will be executed on the same principles as if 
 the battalion marched by the front fank. 
 
 704. When a battalion, advancing in line of battle, 
 shall be obliged to execute the right about in order 
 to retreat, if there be companies in column, behind 
 the rear rank, these companies will also execute the 
 right about, put themselves in march, at the same 
 time with the battalion, and will thus precede it in 
 
 I the retreat; they will afterwards successively put 
 I themselves into line by the oblique step, as the ground 
 j may permit. 
 
 705. If the battalion be marching in retreat in 
 j double quick time, and many contiguous companies, 
 
 be marching before the rear rank of the battalion, 
 
158 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 
 
 the colonel will uot change the gait of the battalion 
 in causing them to re-enter into line. 
 
 706. When the color-company Bhall be obliged to 
 execute the movement of passing an obstacle, the 
 color-rank will return into line at the moment the 
 company shall f ice to the left or right ; the major 
 will place himself six paces before the extremity of 
 the company behind which the color company marches 
 in column, in order to give the step and the direc- 
 tion ; he, himself, first tailing the step from the bat- 
 talion. 
 
 707. As soon as the color-company shall have re- 
 turned into line, the front rank of the color-guard 
 will again move out six paces in front of the battal- 
 ion, and take the step from the major ; the latter will 
 immediately place himself twenty or thirty paces in 
 front of the color-bearer, and face to the colonel 
 placed behind the centre of the battalion, who will 
 establish him on the perpendicular ; and, as soon as 
 he shall be assured on it, the color-bearer will instant- 
 ly take two points on the ground between himself and 
 the major. 
 
 708. It is prescribed, as a general rule, that the 
 companies of the right wing ought to execute the 
 movement of passing obstacles by the left flank, and 
 the reverse for the companies of the other wing ; but 
 if the obstacle cover at once several companies of the 
 centre, each will file into column behind that, still in 
 line, and of the same wing, which may be the nearest 
 to it. 
 
-/J9. 
 
 mmy"'-:^^ . i -mmm^ ^ik^mmmmmmmmm — ' ^m . 
 
 nil ^X 
 
 JHIB 
 
 b. 
 
 1 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 159 
 
 Article Ninth. 
 To pass a defile, in retreat, by the right (or left) flank. 
 
 709. When a battalion, retiring in line, shall en- 
 count»^r a d;'file which it must pass, the colonel will 
 halt the battalion, and face it to the front. 
 
 710. It will be supposed that the defile is in rear of 
 the left flank, ami that its width is sufficient to give 
 passage to a column by platoon ; the colonel will 
 place a marker fifteen or twenty paces in rear of the 
 file closers at the point anuiud which the subdivisions 
 will have to change direction in order to enter the 
 defile; he wall then command: 
 
 To the rear, by the right flank, pass the defile. 
 
 711. The captain of the first company will imme- 
 diately command : 
 
 1. First company, right— Face. 2. March (or 
 double quick — March). 
 
 712. At the command march, the first company 
 will commence the movement; the first file will 
 wheel to the right, march to the rear till it shall 
 have passed four paces beyond the file closers, when 
 it will wheel again to the right, and then direct it- 
 self straight forward towards the left fiank. All the 
 other files of this company will come to wheel 
 
 L 
 
 -•^ • 
 
160 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 
 
 in succession at the same place where the first had 
 wheeled. 
 
 713. The second company will execute, in its turn, 
 the same movement, by the commands of its captain, 
 who will give the command March, so that the first 
 file of his company may immediately follow the last 
 of the first, without constraint, however, as to tak- 
 ing the step of the first ; the first file of the second 
 company will wheel to the right, on its ground ; all 
 the other files of this company will come in succes- 
 sion to wheel at the same place. The following 
 companies will execute, each in its turn, what has 
 just been prescribed for the second. 
 
 714. When the whole of the second company shall 
 be on the same direction with the first, the captain 
 of the first will cause it to form, by platoons into 
 line, and. the moment that it is in column, the guide 
 of the first platoon will direct himself on the marker 
 around whom he has to change direction in order to 
 enter the defile. 
 
 715. The second company will contimie to march 
 by the flank, directing itself parallelly with the line 
 of battle; audit, in its turn, will form by platoon 
 into line, when the third company shall be wholly on 
 the same direction with itself. 
 
 716. The following companies will successively 
 execute what has just been prescribed for the se- 
 cond, and each will form by platoon into line, when 
 the next company shall be on the same direction with 
 itself. 
 
 717. The first platoon of the leading company hav- 
 ing arrived opposite to the marker placed at the en- 
 trance of the defile, will turn to the left, and the fol- 
 
SCHOOL OF THE P.ATTALION-^PART V. 161 
 
 lowing platoons will all execute this movement at the 
 same point. As j;he last companies will not be able 
 to form platoons before reaching ttie defile, they will 
 so direct themselves, in entering it, as to leave room 
 to the left for this movement. 
 
 ■jyS. The battalion will thus pass the defile by pla- 
 toon: and, as the two platoons of each company 
 shall dear it, companies will be successively formed 
 by the means indicated, school of the company. No' 
 273, and following. 
 
 719. The head of the column havlug cleared the 
 defile, and having reached the dist<ince at which the 
 colonel wishes to re-form line faced to the defile, he 
 may cause the leading company to turn to .the left, 
 to prolong the column in that direction, and Ihen 
 form it to the left iito line of battle; or h'e may halt 
 the column, and form it into lifse of battle faced to the 
 rear. 
 
 ■''720. If the defile be in the rear of the right flank, 
 it will be passed by the left ; the movement will be 
 executed according to the same principles, and by 
 inverse means. 
 
 721. If the defile be too narrow to receive the 
 front of a platoon, it will be passed by the flank. 
 Captains and file closers will be watchful that the 
 files do not lose their distiinces in marching. Com- 
 panies or platoons wijl he formed into line as the 
 width of the defile may permit, or as the companies 
 shall successively clear it. 
 11* 
 
165 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 
 
 ARTICLE Tenth. 
 To march by the flank. 
 
 722. The colonel, wisliiiig' the battalion to march 
 by the flank will command : 
 
 1. Battalion. 2. Right {ox left)— F ACF.. 3. Forward. 
 4. Warch {i)v double quick — March). 
 
 723. At the second command, the captains and 
 covering sergeants will place thcniselves as prescribed, 
 Nos. 13«5 and 141, school of the company. 
 
 724. The sergeant on the left of the battalion will 
 place hi'iiiself to the left and by the side of the last 
 file of his company, covering the captains in file. 
 
 725. The battalion having ta fiice by the left 
 flank, the captains, at the second command, will 
 shitt rapidly to the left of their companies, and each 
 place himself by the side of the covering sergeant of 
 the company preceding his own, except the captain 
 of the left company, who will place himself by the 
 side of the sergeant on the left of the battalion. The 
 covering sergeant of the rioht company will place 
 himself by the right side of the front rank man of 
 the rearmost file pf his company, covering the cap- 
 tains in file. 
 
 726. At the command march, the battalion will step 
 off with life; the sergeant, placed before the leading 
 file fright or left in front), will be carefnl to pre- 
 serve exactly the length and cadence of the step, and 
 
_^^ 
 
 j^S^ 
 
 rrTT 
 
 rTTT 
 
 rrrr 
 rxrr 
 cm 
 r i 1 n 
 
 1.1 ! 11 
 
 1 " 'i v\..\ 
 
 tunrD 
 
 Li_j_j_j 
 
 L-i I ! .1 
 
 cxrp 
 
 i I I, I I 
 
 I i ! I, I 
 
 rrm 
 
 I I ! 1 I 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 163 
 
 to direct himself strai^fht forward ; to this end he 
 will take points on the ground. 
 
 727. Whether the battalion march by the right or 
 left flank, the lientenant colonel will place himself 
 abreast with the leading file, and the major abreast 
 with the cohir-file, both'on the side of the front rank, 
 and about six paces from it. ^ 
 
 728. The adjutant, placed between the lieutenant 
 colonel and the front rank, will march in the same 
 step with the head of the battalion, and the ser- 
 geant major, placed between the major and the color- 
 bearer, will march in the same step with the adju- 
 tant. 
 
 729. The captains .and file closers will carefully 
 see that the files neither open out, -n(>r dose too 
 much, and that they regain insensibly their distances, 
 if lost. 
 
 730. The colonel wishing the battalion to wheel by 
 file, will command: 
 
 1. By file right (or left). 2. March. 
 
 731. The files will wheel in succession, and all at 
 the place where the first had wheeled, in conforming 
 to the principles prescribed in the school of the 
 company. 
 
 732. The battalion marching by the flank, when 
 the colonel shall wish to halt it, he will command : 
 
 ]. Battalion 2. Halt, 3, Frokt, 
 
 733. These commands will be executed as pre- 
 scribed in the school of the company, No. 146. 
 
164 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION- PART V. 
 
 734. If the battalion be marching by the flank and 
 the coUniel should wish .to cause it to march in line, 
 either to the front or to the rear, the movements will 
 be executed by.the commands and means prescribed 
 in the school of the company. 
 
 Article Eleventh. ' 
 
 To form the battalion on the right or left, by file, into 
 line of battle. 
 
 735. The battalion marching by the right flank, 
 when the colonel shall wish to form it on the right by 
 file, he wnll determine the line of battle, and the lieu- 
 tenant colonel will place two markers on that line, in 
 conformity with what is prescribed, No. 4! 5. 
 
 736. The head of the battalion being nearly up with 
 the first marker, the colonel will command : 
 
 1. On the right, by fie, into line. 2. Maucii (or 
 double quick — MaiichJ. 
 
 737. At the command march, the leading company 
 will form itself on the right, by file, into line of bat- 
 tle, as indicated in the school of the company. No. 
 149 ; the front rank man of the first file will rest his 
 breast lightly against the right arm of the first 
 marker ; the other companies will follow the move- 
 ment of the leading company ; each captain will 
 place himself on the line at the same time with the 
 front rank man of his first file, and on the right of 
 this mun. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. ]65 
 
 738. The left guide of each company, except the 
 leading one, will place himself on the direction of the 
 markers, and opposite to the left file of his company, 
 at the instant that the front rank man of this file ar- 
 rives on the line. 
 
 739. The formation being ended, the colonel will 
 command : 
 
 Gwir/cs— Posts. 
 
 ■ 740. The colonel will superintend the successive 
 formation of the battalion, moving along the front of 
 the line of battle. 
 
 741. The lieutenant colonel will, in succepsion, as- 
 sure the direction of the guides, and see that the men 
 of the front rank, in placing themselves on ttie line, 
 do not pass it. . 
 
 742. If the battalion march by the left flank, the 
 movement will be executed according to the same 
 principles, and by inverse means. 
 
 Article Twelfth. 
 
 Changes of front. 
 
 Change of front perpendicularly fortcard. 
 
 743. The battalion being in line of battle, itig sup- 
 posed to be the wish of the colonel to cause a change 
 of front forward on the right company, and that the 
 angle formed by the old and new positi(nis be a right 
 angle, or a few degrees more or b'ss than* one ; he 
 will caus6 two markers to be placed on the new 
 direction, before the position to be occupied by that 
 
16fi SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 
 
 company, and order its captain to establish it against 
 the markers. 
 
 744. The captain of th'e right company will imme- 
 diately direct it upon the markers by a wheel to the 
 right on the fixed pivot; and after having halted it, 
 he will align it by the right. 
 
 745. These dispositions being made, the colonel 
 will command : 
 
 1. Change front forward on first company. 2. By 
 company, right half lohcel. 3. March [or double 
 quick— M.A.Rcn'\. 
 
 746. At the second command, each company will 
 place himself before the centre of his company. 
 
 747. At the third, each company will wheel to the 
 right on the fixi3d pivot; the left guide of each will 
 place him -elf on its left as soon as he shall be able 
 to pass ; and when the colonel shall judge that the 
 companies have sufficiently wheeled, he will com- 
 mand : , 
 
 4. Foricard. 5. March. 6. Guide right. 
 
 748. At the fifth command, the companies ceasing 
 to wheel will march straight forward ; at the sixth, 
 the men will touch elbows towards the right. 
 
 749'. The right guide of the second company will 
 march, straight forward until this company shall arrive 
 at the point where it should turn to the right ; each 
 succeeding right guide will follow the file immediately 
 before him at the cessation of the wheel, and will 
 march in the trace of this file until this company shall 
 
y^^ 
 
 "H "H 
 
 ^ 4^ 
 
 \' 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 167 
 
 turn to the right to move upon the Hue; this guide 
 will then inarch straight forward. 
 
 750. The second conipanj: having arrived opposite 
 to the left file of the finst, its captain will cause it to 
 turn to the right ; the right guide will direct him- 
 self so as to arrive squarely upon the line of battle, 
 and when he shall be at three paces from that line, 
 the captain will command : 
 
 1. Second company. 2. HALT. 
 
 751. At the second command, the company will 
 halt ; the files not yet in line with the guide will come 
 into it promptly, the left guide will place himself on 
 the line of battle, and as soon -as he is assured in tBe 
 direcfion by the lieutenant colonel, the captain will 
 align the c(»miiany by the right. 
 
 752. Each following company will conform to what 
 has just been prescribed for the second. 
 
 753. The formation ended, the colonel will com- 
 mand : 
 
 Guides — Posts. 
 
 754. If the battalion be in march, and the colonel 
 shall wish to change front forward on the first com- 
 pany, and that the angle formed by the old and new 
 jjositions be a right angle, he will cause two markers 
 to bo placed on the new direction, before the position 
 to be occupied by that company, and will command : 
 
168 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 
 
 I. Change front forward on first company. 2. By 
 company, right half ichcel. 3. March [or double 
 quick— 'March^. 
 
 755. At the first counnand, the captains will move 
 rapidly before the centre of their respective com- 
 panies; the captain of the first company will com- 
 mand : L Right turn ; 2. Quick time ; the captains 
 of the other companies, will caution them to wheel tc 
 the right. 
 
 75G. At the command march, the first company 
 will turn to the right according to the principl»^s pre- 
 scribed in the schotd of the soldier, No. 402; its cap- 
 tain will halt it at three paces from the markers, and 
 the files in roar will promptly come into line. The 
 captain will align the company by the right. • 
 
 757. 'Each of the oth(M* companies will wheel to 
 the right on a fixed pivot; the left guides will place 
 themselves on the left of their respecttve comi)anies, 
 and when the colonel shall judge they have wheeled 
 sufficiently, he will command : 
 
 4. Forward. 5. March. 6. Guide right. 
 
 758. These commands will be executed as indica- 
 ted No. 746 and fidlowing. 
 
 750. The colmiel will cause the battalion to change 
 front forward on the eighth company according to 
 the same principles and by inverse means. 
 
rr, r.A.rrrT.ATTnN— PART V. 169 
 
 1 
 
«S1 
 
 \ 
 
 ^JSSJiPe-. ■■■'fxs•'i^ 
 
 \ 
 
 K 
 
 \ 
 
 ^^•- 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
 -■■J 
 
 -U 
 
, 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 169 
 
 Change of front perpendicularly to the' rear. 
 
 7G0. Tho colnnel wishing to change front to the 
 rear on the right company, will impart his purpose to 
 the captain of this compau5^ The latter will imme- 
 diately face his company about, wheel it to the left 
 on the fixed pivot, and halt it when it sliall be in the 
 direction indicated to him \ij the colonel : the cap- 
 tain will then fice his company to the front, and align 
 it by the right against the two markers, whom the 
 colonel will cause to be establisl ed before the right 
 and left files. 
 
 76 J. These dispositions bein^ made, the colonel 
 will command : 
 
 1. Change front to the rear, on first company. 2. Bat- 
 talion about — Face. 3. By company, left half 
 wheel. 4. March (or double quick — March). 
 
 762. At the second command, all the companies, 
 except the right, will face about. 
 
 763. At the third, the captains, whose companies 
 have ficed about, will each place himself behind the 
 centre of his company, two paces from the front 
 rank, now the rear. <* 
 
 764. At the fourth, these companies will w^heel to 
 the left on the fixed pivot by the rear rank : the left 
 guide of each will, as soon as he is able to pass, place 
 himself on the left of the rear rank of his company, 
 now become the right ; and when the colonel shall 
 judge that the companies have sufficiently wheeled, 
 he will command : 
 
SCHOOL OF T[IE BATTALION-PART V. 
 
 5. Forward. 6. March. 7. Guide left. 
 
 765. A-t the sixth command, the companies will 
 cease to wheel, march straight forward towai'ds the 
 new line of battle, and, at the seventh, take the touch 
 of the elbow towards the left. 
 
 766. The guide of each company on its right flank, 
 become left, will conform himself to the principles 
 prescribed. No. 748. 
 
 767. The second company, from the right, having 
 arrived opposite to the left of the first, will turn to 
 the left; the guide will so direct himself as to arrive 
 parallelly with the line of battle, cross that line, and 
 when the front rank, now in the rear, shall be three 
 paces beyond if, the captain will command : 1. Se- 
 cond company ; 2. Halt. 
 
 768. At the second command, the company will 
 halt; the files which may not yet be in line with the 
 guide, will promptly C( me into it ; the captain will 
 cause the company to face about, and then align it by 
 the right. 
 
 769. All the other companies will execute what has 
 just been prescribed for the second, each as it succes- 
 sively arrives opposite to the left of the company that 
 precedes it on the new line of battle. 
 
 770. The formation being ended, the colonel will 
 command : 
 
 Guides— Vo'^TS. 
 
 771. The colonel will cause a cliiuige of front on 
 the left company of the battalion to the rear, ac- 
 cording to the same principles and by inverse means. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 171 
 
 772. In changes of front, the colonel will give a 
 general superintendence to the movement. 
 
 773. The lieutenant colonel -will assure the direc- 
 tion of the cuides as they successively move out on 
 the line of battle, conforming himself to what has 
 been prescribed in the succesisive formations. 
 
 Remarks on changes of front. 
 
 774. When the new direction is perpendicular, or 
 nearly so, to that of the battfllion, the companies ought 
 to make about a half trhrel (the eighth of the circle^ 
 before march'ing straight forward; but when those 
 two lines are obliqne to each other, the smaller the 
 angle which they form, the less ou<rht the companies 
 to wheel. It is for the colonel to judge, according to 
 the angle, the.precise time when he ought to give the 
 command march, after the cautiiui foricard, and if he 
 cannot^catch the exact moment, the word of execu- 
 tion should rather be given a little too soon, than an 
 instant too late. 
 
 775. When the old and the new lines form an angle 
 of forty-five or fewer degrees, the colonel will find it 
 necessary to arrest the wheel of the companies when 
 the marching flanks shall have taken but a few paces, 
 or, it may be, have butdisenaaged, respectively, from 
 the fixed pivots of the next companies; and in all such 
 cases, the companies will arrive so nearly, parallel to 
 the new line, as to be able to align themselves upon 
 it without the intermediate turn to the rifiht or left ; 
 
172 SCH'OL OF THE EATTAUoN— PART V. 
 
 to execute the movement under either circumstance 
 supposed, the colonel will command:' 
 
 Oblique change of front, forward, (or to the rear) on 
 
 (such compavTj.) 
 
 Article Thirteenth. 
 
 To ploy the hattalion into column doubled on the centre. 
 
 776. This movement consists in ploying the eorres- 
 pondin«[ companies of the. right and left wings into 
 'column at compnny distance, or closed in mass, in 
 rear of the tw© centre companies, according to the 
 principles prescribed, Article Third, Part Second, of 
 this School. 
 
 777. The colonel, wishing to form the double col- 
 umn at company distance, fthe battalion being iuliue 
 of battle,) will command: 
 
 1. Double column, at half distance. 2. Battalion, in- 
 wards— Face. 3. March (or double quick — 
 MarchJ. 
 
 778. At the first commAnd, the captains will place 
 themselves two paces in front of thdr respective com- 
 panies ; the captains of the two centre companies will 
 caution them to stand fast, and the other Ciiptains 
 will caution their C(mipanies to face to the left and 
 right, respectively. The covering sergeants will step 
 into the front rank. 
 
H^.l. 
 
 Fi^.3 
 
to execi 
 supposct 
 
 Oblique 
 
 To ploy . 
 
 776. T 
 pondin*: 
 'column a 
 rear of tl 
 principle! 
 this Scho 
 
 777. T. 
 mv.n at c« 
 of battle, 
 
 1. Double 
 wards— 
 March 
 
 778. A1 
 them solve 
 panics; tl 
 caution t, 
 will cauti 
 right, resi 
 into the fi 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 173 
 
 779. At the second command, the fourth and fifth 
 companies will stand fast ; the others of the right 
 wing will face to the left, and the others of the left 
 wing will face to the right ; each captain whose com- 
 pany has faced, will hasten to break to the rear the 
 two files at the head of his company ; the left guide of 
 each right company, and the right guide of each left 
 company, will each place himself at the head of its 
 front rank, and the captain by the sidB of kis guide. 
 
 780. At the command march, the fourth and fifth 
 companies, which are to form the first division, will 
 stand fast; the senior captain ot the two will place 
 himself before the centre of the division, and com- 
 mand : Guide right ; the junior captain will place 
 himself in the interval between the two companies, 
 and the left guide of the left company will place him- 
 self in the front rank on the left of the division, as 
 soon as he shall be able to pass*. 
 
 781. All the other companies, conducted by their 
 captains, will step off with life to arrang;e themselves 
 in column at company distance, each company behind 
 the preceding one in the colunm of the same wing,'so 
 that, in the right wing, the third may be next beldnd 
 the fourth, the second next to the third, and so on to 
 the right company; and, in the left wing, the sixth 
 may be next behind the- fifth, the seventh next to ihe 
 sixth, and so oa to the left company of the battalion. 
 
 782. The corresponding companies of the two wings 
 will unite into divisions in arraiigiiig themselves in 
 
 1 column ; an instant before the union, at the centre of 
 Ithe column, the left guides of right companies will 
 mass into the line of file closers, and each captain will 
 
174 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 
 
 command: I. Such company ; 2. Halt; 3. FiiONT. 
 
 783. At the second command, which shall be given 
 at the instant of union, each company will halt ; at 
 the third, it will face to the front. The senior captain 
 in each division will place himself on its right, and 
 command, Right — UiiESS, and the junior captain will 
 place himself in the interval between the two com- 
 panies. The division being aligned, its chief will 
 comnuuul Fkont, and take his position two paces be- 
 fore its centre. 
 
 784. The c(dumn being thus formed, the divisions 
 will take the respective denominations ()fy?>if, sccort</, 
 third, &(i., according to position in the column, be- 
 ginning at the front. 
 
 785. The lieutenant colonel, who, at the second 
 command given by the colonel, will have placed him- 
 self at a little more than company distance in rear of 
 the right guide of the first division, will assure the 
 right guides on the direction as they successively ar- 
 rive, by placing himself iu their rear. 
 
 786. The music will pass to the rear of the column. 
 
 787. The battalion being in march, to form the 
 double column at company distance without halting 
 the battalion, the colonel will command: 
 
 1. Double column at half distance. 2. Battalion, by 
 
 the right and left flanks. 
 
 3. Maucii (or double quick— March). 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART t. 175 
 
 788. At the first command, each captain will move 
 briskly in front of the centre of his company; the cap- 
 tains of the fourth and fifth will caution their com 
 panies to march straight forward ; the other captains 
 will caution their companies to face to the right and 
 left. 
 
 789. At the command march, the fourth and fifth 
 companies will continue to march straight forward; 
 the senior captain will place himself before the cen- 
 tre of his division and command, Guide right; the 
 junior captain will place himself in the interval be- 
 tween the two companies. The left guide of the fifth 
 company will place himself on the left of the front 
 rank of the division. The men will take the touch of 
 elbows to the right. The color and general guides 
 will retake their places. The three right companies 
 will face to the left and the three left companies will 
 face to the right. Each captain will break to the rear 
 two files at the head of his company ; the left guides 
 of the right companies, and the right guides of the 
 left companies, will each place himself at the head 
 of the front rank of his company, and the captain by 
 the side of his guide. 
 
 790. The third and sixth companies will enter the 
 column and direct themselves parallelly to the first 
 division. Each of the other companies, will in like 
 manner, place itself behind the company of the wing 
 to which it belongs, and -will be careful to gain as 
 much ground as possible towards the head of the 
 column. 
 
 791. The corresponding companies of each wing 
 will unite into divisions on taking their positions in 
 colunm, and each captain, the instant the head of his 
 
176 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 
 
 company arrives at the centre of tlie column, will 
 command, 1. Such coiitpany by tin., right ( or left.)Jla?ik. 
 2. March. The senior captaiii of the two con>panies 
 will place himself in front of the centre of his divi- 
 sion, and conmiand, Guide right; the junior captain 
 will place himself in the interval between the two 
 companies. The two companies thus formed into a 
 division will take the touch of elbows to the rijL'ht, 
 and when each division has gained its proper distance, 
 its chief will cause it to march in quick time. 
 
 792. When the battalion presents an oddnuniberof 
 companies, the foi-mation will be made in like manner, 
 and the con)pany on either flank which shall lind it- 
 self without a corresponding one, will place itself at 
 company distance behind the wing to which it be- 
 longs. 
 
 793. The double column, closed in mass, will be 
 formed according to the same principles and by the 
 same commands, substituting the indication, closed in 
 mass, for that of at half distance. 
 
 794. The double column never being formed when 
 two or more battalions are to be in one general col- 
 umn, it will habitually take the guide to the right, 
 sometimes to the left, or in the centre of the colunm; 
 iu the last case, the command will be, guide centre. 
 The column will march and change direction accord- 
 ing to the principles prescribed for a simple column 
 by division. 
 
 795. The double column at company distance will 
 be closeu in mass, ul", if "Snii mass, will take half dis- 
 tance, by the commands and means indicated for a 
 simple column by divisi(»u. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION-- PART V. 
 
 Deployment of the double column, faced to the front. 
 
 796. The colonel, wishing to deploy the double col- 
 umn, will place a marker respectively before the right 
 and left files of the first division, and a third before 
 the left file of the right company, same division ; which 
 being done, he will cause the two general guides to 
 spring out on the alignment of the markers a little be- 
 yond the points at which the respective flanks of the 
 battalion ought to rest; he will then command: 
 
 ]. Deploy column. 2. Battalion outicards — Face. 
 3. March [or double quick — March]. 
 
 797. The column will deploy itself on the two com- 
 panies jit its head, acccft'ding to the principles pre- 
 scribed for the deployment of columns in mass. The 
 captains of these companies will each, at the command 
 march, place himself on the right of his own company, 
 and align it by the right; the captain of the fourth 
 will then place himself in the rear rank, and the cover- 
 ing sergeant in the rank of file closers, «t the moment 
 the captiiiii of the third shall come to its left to 
 align it. 
 
 798. The deployment being ended the colonel will 
 command : 
 
 Guides — Posts. 
 
 r99. If it be the wish of the colonel to cause the fire 
 ito comn-ence pending the deployment, he will give an 
 12^ 
 
178 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PAJIT V. 
 
 order to that effect to the captains of the fourth and 
 fifth conipaiiies, and the fire will be executed accord- 
 ing to the principles prescribed No. 438. 
 
 800. The battalion being in double column and in 
 march, if the colonel shall wish to deploy it without 
 halting the column, he will cause three markers to 
 be posted on the line of battle, and when the head (►f 
 the column shall arrive near the markers, he will 
 command : 
 
 1. Deploy column. 2. Battalion by the right and left 
 flanks. 3. March (or double quick — March). 
 
 801. The column will deploy on the two- leading 
 companies, according to the principles prescribed for 
 the deployment of a close column, No. 533 and fol- 
 lowing; at the command march, the chief of the first 
 division will halt it, and the captains of the fourth 
 and fifth companies will align their companies by the 
 right. 
 
 802. If the column be in march, and it be the wish 
 of the colonel to deploy the column and to continue to 
 march in the order of battle, he will nA cause mark- 
 ers to be established at the head of the column. The 
 movemQut will be executed by the commands and 
 means indicated No. 800, observing what follows. At 
 the first command, the chief of the first division will 
 command, Quick time. At the command march, the 
 first division will continue -to march in quick time; 
 the colonel will command, Guide centre. Ttie captains 
 of the fourth and fifth companies, the color, and the 
 
aCHOOL OF THE BATTALION -PART V. 179 
 
 men, will immediately conform to the principles of the 
 march in line of battle. The companies will take the 
 quick step by the command of their captains, as they 
 successively arrive in line. The movement comple- 
 ted, the colonel may cause the battalion to march 
 in double quick time. 
 
 To form the dooble column into line of battle, faced to 
 the right or left. 
 
 803. The double column, being at company distance 
 and at a halt, may beT»trmed into line of battle foced 
 to the right or left ; when the colonel shall wish to 
 form it faced to the right, he will command : 
 
 1. Right into line icheel, left companies on the right 
 into line. 2. Battalion, guide right. 3. March 
 Cor double quick — March j. 
 
 804. At the first command, each captain will place 
 himself before the centre of his company; the right 
 companies will be cautioned that they will have to 
 wheel to the right into line, the left companies that 
 they will have to march straight forward. 
 
 805. At the second command, the left guide of the 
 fourth company will place himself briskly on the di- 
 rection of the right guides of the column, face to them, 
 and opposite to one of the three last files of his com- 
 pany when in line of battle ; the lieuteuant colonel will 
 assure him in that position. 
 
 806. At the command march, briskly repeated by 
 all the captains, the right companies will form to the 
 
180 BCIIOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 
 
 right into lino of battle, the left companies will put 
 themselves in march in order to form on the right in- 
 to line of battle; these formations will be executed by 
 the means indicated No. 391 and following, No. 416 
 and following ; the lieutenant colonel will assure the 
 guides of the left wing on the line of battle as they 
 successively come upon it. 
 
 807. If the column be in march, the colonel will 
 command : 
 
 1. Right into line wheel. 2. Left companies on the 
 right into line. 3. Battalion guide right. 4. March 
 Cor double quick— lslAB.en). 
 
 808. At the first command, each captain will place 
 himself promptly before the centre of his company ; 
 the right companies will be cautioned that they will 
 have to wheel to the right, and the left companies 
 that they will have to form on the right into line. 
 
 809. At the command march, briskly repeated, the 
 right companies will form to the right into line, and 
 the left companies on the right into line. These 
 formations will be executed as prescribed Nos. 402, 
 417, and following, 
 
 810. If the colonel should wish to move the battal- 
 ion forward, at the moment the right companies have 
 completed the wheel, he will command : 
 
 5. Forward. 6. MARCH for double quick — MARCH ). 
 
SCHOUL OF THE BATTALION— PART V, 181 
 
 811. At the command forward, the captains of the 
 right companies will command, Qidck time. At the 
 command inarch, the ri^ht companies will cease to 
 wheel and march straight forward. The colonel will 
 then add: 
 
 7. Guide centre. 
 
 812. The movement of the left companies will be 
 executed in double quick time as presci-ibed above, 
 and as they arrive on the line each captain will cause 
 his company to march in quick time. 
 
 813. The column may be formed faced to the left 
 into line of battle according to tlie same principles. 
 
 814. If the column be closed in mass instead of at 
 co^iipany distance, these movements will be executed 
 according to the principh's prescribed Nos. 417, 502, 
 and 510. 
 
 Remark on the deployment of the double column. 
 
 815. The depth of the double column, at company 
 distance, being inconsiderable, closing it in mass, if 
 at a halt, in order to deploy it, may be dispensed 
 with ; but if it be in march, it will be preferable to 
 cause it so to close, in halting, before deploying. 
 
 81C. The Rouble column will be deployed habitual- 
 ly on the centre companies, but the colonel may some- 
 I times deploy it on any interior company, or on the 
 first or eighth company. 
 
i 
 
 182 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V 
 
 Articlf Fourteenth. 
 
 Dispositions Against Cavalry. 
 
 817. A battalion being in column by company, at 
 full distance, right in front, and at a halt, when the 
 colonel shall wish to form it into square, he will first 
 cause divisions to be formed ; which being done, he 
 will command : 
 
 1. To form square. 2. To half distance close column. 
 3. March or (douhle quick— Marcw^. 
 
 818. At the command march, the column will close 
 to company distance, the second division, taking its 
 distance from, the rear rank of the first division. 
 
 819. At the moment of halting the fourth division, 
 the file closers of each company of which it is com- 
 posed, passing by the outer flank of their companies 
 will place themselves two paces before the front rank 
 opposite, to their respective places in line of battle, 
 and face towards the head of the column. 
 
 820. At the commencement of the movement, the 
 major will place himself on the right of the column 
 abreast with the first division ; the buglers formed 
 in two ranks will place themselves at platoon distance, 
 behind the inner platoons of the second division. 
 
 821. These dispositions being made, the colonel 
 may, according to circumstances, put the column in 
 
/y/- 
 
 £4^, 
 
 T- ■ - IT' -P 
 
 '';ODD 
 
 DO □ □ OO; 
 
 "H 
 
 U P 
 
 ;d q a 
 
 Q D DO qoq; 
 
 U.J |- 
 
 4 R • " ->▼ 
 
 loo ^ 
 
 - J o a o o «. 
 
 '^ 
 
 H ^- 
 
 Fiel' 
 
 Fii.2. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 183 
 
 march, or cause it to form square ; if he wish to do 
 the latter, he will command : 
 
 1. Form square. 2. Right and left into line, icheel. 
 
 822. At the first command, the lieutenant colonel, 
 facing to the left guides, and the major, facing to those 
 of the right, will align them, from the front, on the 
 respective guides of the fourth division, who will 
 stand fast, holding up their pieces, inverted, perpen- 
 dicularly ; the right guides, in placing themselves on 
 the direction, will take their exact distances. 
 
 t523. At the second command, the chief of the first 
 division will caution it to stand f^jst; all the captains 
 of the second and third divisions will place themselves 
 before the centres of their i^spective companies, and 
 caution tliem that they will have to wheel, the right 
 companies to the right, and the left companies to the 
 left into line of battle. 
 
 824. The color-bearer will step back into the line 
 of file closers, opposite to his place in line of battle, 
 and will be replaced by the corporal of his file, who 
 is in the rear rank, the corporal of the same file who 
 is in the rank of file closers will s]^ep into the rear 
 rank. 
 
 S'2."). The chief of the fourth division will command : 
 1. Fourth division, forward ; 2. Guide /e/if, and place 
 himself at the same time two paces outside of its left 
 fluik. 
 
184 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 
 
 826. These dispositions ended, the colonel will com- 
 mand : 
 
 March [or doiihle quick — March]. 
 
 827. At this command, brisldy repeated, the first 
 division will stand fiist; but its right file will face to 
 the right, and its left file, to the left. 
 
 828. The companies of the second and third divi- 
 sions will wheel to the right and left into line, and 
 the bnglers will advance a space equal to the front of 
 a company. 
 
 829. The fourth division will close up to form the 
 square, and when it shall have closed, its chief will 
 halt it, face it about, and align it by the rear rank 
 upon the guides of the division, who will, for this j^r- 
 pose, remain faced to the front. The junior captain 
 will pass into the rear rank, now become the front, 
 and the covering sergeant of the left company will 
 place himself behind him in the front ranli, become 
 rear. The file closers will, at the same time, close 
 up a pace on the front rank, and the outer file ou each 
 flank of the division will face outwards. 
 
 830. The square being formed, . the colonel will 
 command : 
 
 Guides— FosTS. 
 
 831 At this command, the chiefs of the first and 
 fourth divisions, as well as the guides, will enter the 
 squai-e. 
 
 8.32. The captains whose companies have formed to 
 the right into line, will remain on the left of their com- 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V 185 
 
 panies; tlie left guide of en eh of those companies 
 will, in the rear rank, cover his captain, and the cov- 
 ering sergeant of each will place himself as a file 
 closer behind the right file of his company. 
 
 833. The field and staff will entev the square, the 
 lieutenant colonel placing himself behind the left, and 
 the m;ijor behind the right of the first division. 
 
 8.34. If the battalion present ten, instead of eight 
 companies, the fourth division will -make the same 
 movements prescribed above for the second and third 
 divisions, and the fifth, the movements piescribed for 
 the fourth division. 
 
 835. A battalion ought never to present, neav the 
 enemy's cavalry, an odd company. The odd com- 
 pany, under that circumstance, ought, when the bat- 
 talion is under arms, to be consolidated, for the time, 
 with the other companies. 
 
 836. The fronts of the squai-e will bo designated as 
 follows : the first division will always be the first 
 front ; the last division, the fourth front ; the right 
 companies of the other divisions will form the second 
 front ; and the left companies of the same divisions 
 the third front. 
 
 837. A battalion being in column by company, at 
 full distance, right in front, and in march, when the 
 cohtnel shall wish to form square, he will cause this 
 movement to be executed by the commands and means 
 indicated, No. 817. 
 
 838. At the command march, the column will close 
 to company distance, as is prescribed. No. 278. When 
 the chief of the fourth- division shall command Quick 
 march, the file closers of this division will place them 
 selves befoz'e the front rank. 
 
186 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. . 
 
 839. The mrijor and the buglers will conform to 
 what is prescribed, No. 820. 
 
 840. If the colonel shall wish to form square, he 
 will command : 
 
 1. Form square. 2. Right and left into line, icheel 
 
 3. March. 
 
 841. .At the first command, the chief of the first 
 division will caution it to halt ; all the captains of the 
 second and third divisions will rapidly place them- 
 selves before the centres of their respective compa- 
 nies, and caution them that they will have to wheel, 
 the right companies to the right, and the left compa- 
 nies to the left into line. Xhe chief of the fourth di- 
 vision will caution it to continue its march, and will 
 hasten to its left flank. At the third command, brisk- 
 ly repeated, the chief of the first division will halt 
 his division and align it to the left, the outer files will 
 face to the right and left, the rest of the movement 
 will be executed as prescribed No. 828 and following. 
 
 842. The lieutenant colonel and the major, at the 
 command march, will conform to what is prescribed, 
 
 No. 822. 
 
 843. If the battalion, before the square is formed, 
 be in double column, the two leading companies 
 will form the first front., the two rear companies 
 the fourth ; the other companies of the right half 
 battalion will form the second, and th(»se of the left 
 half battalion the third front. 
 
 844. The first and fourth fronts will be command- 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 187 
 
 ed by the chiefs of the first aud fourth divisions ; 
 each of the other two by its senior captain. 
 
 845. The commander of each front will place him- 
 self four paces behind its present rear rauk, and will 
 be replaced momentarily in the command of his 
 company by the next in rank therein, 
 
 846. If the cohimn be at full distance, instead of 
 at company distance, as has been supposed, the 
 square will be formed in the manner prescribed, No. 
 8J7 or 838, and following ; and the dispositions indi- 
 cated, Nos. 819 and 820, will be executed at the 
 command form square. 
 
 847. If the column by division, whether double or 
 simple, be in mass, and the colonel shill wish to form 
 it into square, he will first cause it to take company 
 distance ; to this effect, he will command : 
 
 1. To form square. 2. By the head of column, take 
 half distance. 
 
 848. The divisions will take half distance by the 
 means indicated, No. 324, and following. What is 
 prescribed. No. 820, will be executed as the first and 
 second divisions are put in motion. 
 
 849. The colonel will halt the column the moment 
 the third division shall have its distance. As soon as 
 
 4he column is halted, the dispositions indicated. No. 
 819, will be executed, and when these are com- 
 pleted, the colonel may proceed to form square. 
 
188 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. - 
 
 850. If the column be in march, he will also, in 
 the first place, cause company distance to be taken, 
 and, for this purpose, will command : 
 
 1. To form square. 2. By the head of column, take 
 half distance. 3. March [or double quick — 
 March]. 
 
 851. This movement will be executed as prescrib- 
 ed, No. 330, and following. What is prescribed. No. 
 820, will be executed as the first and second divi- 
 sions are put in motion. 
 
 8521. The colonel will proceed to form square the 
 moment the third division shall have its distance ; 
 at th' command form square, the dispositions indica- 
 ted. No. 819, will be executed. If it be intended 
 merely to dispose the column for square, the colonel 
 will not halt the column until the last division has 
 its distance. 
 
 853. In a simple column, left in front, these sev- 
 eral movements will be executed according to the 
 same principles and by inverse means ; but the fronts 
 of the square will have the same designations as if 
 the right of the column were in front, that is, the 
 first division will constitute the first front, and thus 
 of the other subdivisions. 
 
 854. The battalion being formed into square, when 
 the colonel shall wish to cause it to advance a dis- 
 tance less than thirty paces, he will command : 
 
 1. By Imchl front, forward. 2. March. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 189 
 
 855. If it be supposed that the advance be made 
 by the first front, the chief of this front will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. First division, forward. 2. Guide centre. 
 
 856. The chief of the second fiiout will face his 
 front to the left. The captains of the companies com- 
 posing this front will place themselves outside, and 
 on the right of their left guides, who will replace 
 them in the front rank ; the chief of the third front 
 will tace his front to the right, and the captains in 
 this front will place themselves outside, and on the 
 left of their covering sergeants : the chief of the fourth 
 front will face his front about, and command : 1. 
 Fourth division, forward. 2. Guide centre. The cap- 
 tain who is in the centre of the first front, will be 
 charged with the direction of the march, and will re- 
 gulate himself by the means indicated in the school 
 of the company, No. 89. 
 
 857. At the command march, the square will put 
 itself in motion ; the companies marchiifg by the flank 
 will be careful not to lose their distances. The chief 
 of the fourth division will cause his division to keep 
 constantly closed on the flanks of the second and 
 third fronts. 
 
 853. This movement will only be executed in quick 
 time. 
 
 859. The lieutenant colonel will place himself in 
 rear of the file of direction in order to regulate the 
 march. 
 
190 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 
 
 860. If the colonel should wish to halb the square, 
 he will command: 
 
 1. Battalion, 2. Halt. 
 
 861. At the second command, the square will 
 halt ; the fourth front will face about immediately, 
 and without further command ; the second and third 
 fronts will face outwards ; the captains of companies 
 will resume their places as in square. 
 
 862. In moving the square forward by the se- 
 cond, third, or fourth fronts, the same rules will be 
 observed. 
 
 863. The battalion being formed into square, when 
 the colonel shall wish to cause it to advance a greater 
 distance than thirty paces, be will command : 
 
 1. Form column. 
 
 864. The chief of the first front will command : 
 1. First division forward. 2. Guide left. 
 
 865. The commander of the fourth front will cau- 
 tion it to stand fast ; the commander of the second 
 front will cause it to face to the left, and then com- 
 mand. By company, hy file left. The commander of 
 the third front will cause it to face to the right, and 
 then command, By company, by file right. At the 
 moment the second and third fronts face to the left 
 and right, each captain will cause to break to the 
 rear the two leading files of his company. 
 
.^AT 
 
 ccr ^^ „ L o>. W* 
 
 xzim 
 
 Fig. I. 
 
 
 Yie^f 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 191 
 
 86Q. These dispositions being made, the colonel 
 will command : 
 
 3. March (or double rjuick— March). 
 
 867. At this command, the first front will march 
 forward ; its chief will halt it when it shall have ad- 
 vanced a space equal to half its front, and align it by 
 the left. 
 
 86d. The corresponding companies of the second 
 and third fronts will wheel by file to the left and 
 right, and march to meet each othe> behind the cen- 
 tre of the first division, and the moment they unite, 
 the captain of each company will halt his company 
 and face it to the front. The division being re-form- 
 ed, its chief will align it by the left. 
 
 869. The commander of the fourth front will cause 
 it to face about : its file closers will remain before 
 the front rank. 
 
 870. The column being thus ro-formed, the colonel 
 may put it in march by the commands and means pre- 
 scribed. No. 164, and following ; the right guides will 
 preserve company distance exactly as the directing 
 guides. 
 
 871. When the colonel shall wish to re-form 
 square, he will give the commands indicaied. No. 
 
 •840. 
 
 872. To cause the square to march in retreat a 
 distance greater than thirty paces, the colonel will^ 
 
 I first cause column to be formed as indicated No.* 
 863 ; and when formed, he will cause it to face by 
 the rear rank ; to this end, he will command: 
 
 1. To march in retreat. 2. Face by the rear rank. 
 3. Battalion, about — Face. 
 
192 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 
 
 873. At the second command, the file closers of the 
 iuterior divisions will place themselves, passing by 
 the outer flanks of their respective companies, be- 
 hind the front rank opposite to their places in line of 
 battle ; the file closers of the other divisions will 
 stand fast. 
 
 874. At the third command, the battalion will face 
 about; each chief of divisicm will place liimself be- 
 fore its rear rauk, become front, passing through 
 the interval between its two companies; the guides 
 will step into the^rear rank, now front. 
 
 875. The column being thus disposed, the colonel 
 may put it in march, or cause it to form square as if 
 it were faced by the front rank. The squai-e being 
 formed, its fronts will preserve the same designations 
 they had when faced by the front rank. 
 
 876. The battalion being in square by the rear 
 rank, when the colonel shall wish to march it in re- 
 treat or in advance, a distance less than thirty paces, 
 he will conform to what is prescribed No. 854 and 
 following ; otherwise, he will re-form the column 
 according to the principles prescribed No. 863 by 
 marching forward the fourth front. 
 
 877., If the square is to be marched to the front a 
 distance greater than thirty paces, the colonel will 
 face the column by the front rank ; to this end, he 
 will command : 
 
 ]. To inarch in advance. 2. Face by the fronl rank. 
 
 3. Battalion about— FxQVL. 
 
/J^. 
 
 P6^ 
 
 *^^i^S^ 
 
 ^% 
 
 KiiSS 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PAR-T V. 1 93 
 
 878. Which will be executed as prescribed No. 873 
 I aad following. 
 i 870. If the column be marching in advance, and 
 
 the colonel shall wish to march it in retreat, he wiil 
 
 command : 
 
 1. To march in retreat. 2. Battalion right about. 
 3. March or (double guide — March.) 
 
 880. At the second command, the file closers of 
 the secand and third divisions will place themselves 
 rapidly before the front rank of their respective di- 
 visions. At the comnunul vu/rrh, "the colnmn will 
 face about and move of^ to the rear ; the chiefs of di- 
 visi<nis and the guides will conform to what is pre- 
 scribed No. 874. 
 
 881. If the colnmn bo marching in retreat, and 
 the colonel shall wish to march it in advance, he will 
 command : 
 
 1. To march in advance. 2- Battalion rightabout. 
 3. March (or double quick — MArch.) 
 
 882. At the second command, the file closers of 
 the second and third divisions will place themselves 
 before the rear rank of their respective divisions; at 
 the third, the column will face by the front rank. 
 
 To reduce the square. 
 
 883. The colonel wishing to break the square wiH 
 command : 
 
 1. Reduce square. 2. March for double quick — 
 March.) 
 13* 
 
 .;Ji-r - i^--'.«,v 
 
194 SCHOOL OF-THt: BATTALION— PART V. " 
 
 884. This raoveraeiit will be executed in the nmn- 
 ncr iiurif-atetl, Nt). 863 niul following ; but the file 
 closers of the fourth front will place themselves be- 
 hitid the rear rant the ununeiit 4t faces about ; the 
 field and t^taff, the cohu-bearer and bu^'lers, will, at 
 the sttine time, return to their places in column. 
 
 To form square from line of hnillc. 
 
 885. A battalion deployed, may be forpied into 
 square in a direction either parallel or perpendicular 
 to the line of battle. 
 
 886. In the first ca«e, tI^JD colonel will cau-^e the 
 battalion to bieak by division to the rear, by the 
 right or left, and then clof^e the column to half die- 
 taTice, as indicated, No. 817, and following. 
 
 887. 1)1 the second case, he will ploy the battalion 
 into simj^lc column by division at half distance in rear 
 of the right or left division, or into column doubled on 
 the centre. 
 
 888. To ploy the battalion into column upon one of 
 the flank divisions, the colonel will command : 
 
 1. To form square. 2. Column at half distance by 
 division. 11 On the first (oi fifurth) divisioJt. 4, 
 Battalion right (or left) — Face. 5. March Cor 
 double quick — March. ) 
 
 889. This movement will be executed according to 
 the'principles prescril>ed No. 119 and following. 
 
 890. If the battalion be nmrching in line of battle, 
 and the colonel shall wish to form square in a direc- 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V 105 
 
 tion perpendicular to the Ihie of battle, he will com- 
 ma lul : 
 
 1. To form sqtiare. 2. On the first (or fourth 
 dimsion, form- column. 3. Battalion by the right 
 (or bft) flank. 4. MARCH (or double quick— 
 March.) 
 
 891. This movement will be exeeuted according 
 to the principles prescribed for ploj-ing a column by 
 division at half distance, No. 150. The chief of the 
 first division will halt his division at the command 
 march. 
 
 8i)2. To ploy the battalion into double column, the 
 colonel will command : 
 
 1''. To form square. 2.. Double column at half dis- 
 ■* tancc. 3. Battalion imcards -Face. 4, March 
 (or double quick — March.) 
 
 893. This mctvement will be executed as prescribed 
 No. 778 and following. 
 
 894. The battalion being in march, to ploy it into 
 double column to form square, the colonel will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. To form square. 2. Form double column. 3. 
 Battalion by the right and left flanks. 4. MARCH 
 (or double quick— Mahcu.) 
 
 895. This movement will be executed as prescribed 
 No. 788. TJie chief of the leading division will halt 
 his division at the command march. 
 
196 :-;eilOOL OF THE BATTALI"N— PART V. 
 
 Observations relative to the formation of squares in 
 two ranl.s. 
 
 89i), When tte colonel sbull judge it proper to have 
 a reserve, this reserve, in a column of three divisiwis 
 v^'ill be formed of tlio inner pliitoons of the second 
 division. The second division vs'ill, in this case close 
 to platoon distance on the first division. When, the 
 square is formed, the reserve platoon will move for- 
 ward a distance nearly e4uul to a platoon front. 
 
 897. In re-forming column, the first division will 
 move forward platoon, instead of company distance. 
 
 898. If the column be formed of four divitiiions, the 
 inner platoons of the third division w-ill compose the 
 reserve ; then in re-forming column the first divi- 
 sion will conform to the gene'ral rule, and the chief 
 of the third, as soon as his division is formed, will 
 close it to platoon distance on the second division. 
 The colonel may, if necessary, form the reserve of 
 the entire third division. In this case the movement 
 will be executed in the following manner. 
 
 899. If the column be at full distance, when it shall 
 close at the command to form square to half distance, 
 the chief of the third division will cause four files to 
 break to the rear from the right and left of his di- 
 vision : the guides will close upon the outer files 
 remaining in line and the left guide will march ex- 
 actly in the trace of the file immediately in front of 
 him. This division will then close in mass on the 
 second division ; and the chief of the fourth division 
 will close to half distance on the same division. 
 
SCHOOL OF TifE BATTALION -PART V. 197 
 
 900. At the command form square, the chief of the 
 reserve divisiou will comuiand, 1. Tliird division, 
 foncanL 2. Guide centre ; at thi.*! comuiand, the 
 guides- on the flanks will fall into th^ line of- file 
 closers. At the command march, the reserve wiil 
 mave forward the distance of a company froat. When 
 ljalti''d its chief will cause the platoons to be. doubled, 
 and for this purpose will command : 
 
 i. On the centre double platoons. 2. March. 
 
 901. At the first command, the chiefs of platoon 
 will place themselves in front of the centre (»f their 
 respective platoons ; the chief of each outer platoon 
 will face his platoon towards the centre, and cause 
 to break to the rear two files from the left or right. 
 At the command march, the outer platoons will 
 direct their march so as to doubje on the centre 
 platoon at the distance of four paces ; their chiefs 
 will alifi;n these outer platoons on the centre, and 
 the files previously broken to the rear will come into 
 line. 
 
 902. If the column be -it half, instead of full dis- 
 tance, the colonel, bef<u'e forming squjsre, will order 
 the chiefs of the third and fourth divisions to move 
 forwaid their divisions as presetibed No. 809. 
 
 903. If the column be closed In mass, at the com- 
 mand fo form square, the chief of the third division 
 will break four files to the rear from each of the 
 flanks as prescribed No. 899. 
 
 904. The colonel will, halt the column as soon as 
 the second division shaM have gained its distance 
 
193 .^Critrct.1, OF THE- BATI\AL10N— PART V. 
 
 905. If thf colonel shall wish the column to con- 
 tinue niJirching iit the conniiniul, by the head of 
 cofuinn tnkr, ft/i/f dhtfincc, the chief of the j'e.serve 
 division will give his cdutionmy eon>inands in sufR- 
 cie ,t time to place his division in motion sinuilfa- 
 neously with the one wiiich precedes it. The chief 
 of the fourth division will give the command march 
 at the instant tliere is company distance between his 
 division and the second. 
 
 906. When the colonel shall vv'ish to re- form the 
 column, at the command form cohivin, the chief of 
 the third division will coiumaud, l\)rm division; at 
 this couimand, th»^ ciiiefs Of the outer platoons which 
 have doubled ii^rear of the centre platocms, will give 
 the commands and make the preparatory movements 
 for deploying on the centre platoons, which will 
 be executed at the conniiand march given by the 
 colonel and briskly repeated by the chief of this di- 
 vision. The division being re-formed, the chiefs of 
 the oiiter platoons will retake their places in column, 
 and the chief of this division will again cause four 
 files from each of its flunks to break to the rear. 
 
 907. If before the formation of the square, the 
 column had been left in front, it would be formed by 
 the same commands and according to the same prin- 
 ciples. * The second division, in this case, would Ibrm 
 the reserve. 
 
 908. The ccdumn being formed, if the colonel 
 should wish to march it in retreat, he will face Tt 
 by the rear rank. The files of the third division 
 broken off to the rear, w-ill face about with the 
 
SCHOOL OF -THE BATTAtrtON— PART V. - 199 
 
 battalion, and when tlie-column is put in motion, \vill 
 march in front of the rear rank. But shcmM the col- 
 onel wish to r.e form the. square, he will cause the bat- 
 talictn to face by the front rank. 
 
 909. If the battalion i>e in line, instead of in col- 
 umn, tlie chief of the reserve division will bring 
 it into column in such ufmnner that there nuiy be a 
 dista-nce of only four paces between this division and 
 the one which is. to be inimedhitely ia front of it ; 
 and when this division is halted and alij^nrd, its 
 chief will cause tb^ usual nuuiber of files t<) be brokeu 
 to the rear. The chief of the division which should 
 occupy in-colunm a position immediately in re?ir of 
 the reserve 'division will, on entering the column, 
 take a distance of twelve paces between it and the 
 division established immediately in front of the re- 
 serve division. 
 
 Squares in four ranks. 
 
 910. If the square formed in two ranks, according 
 to the preceding rules, should not be d^^emed suffi- 
 ciently strong, the colonel may cause the square to 
 
 be ftnaed in four ranks. 
 
 911. The battalion being m column by company at 
 full distance, right in front, and at a halt, when the 
 Coloivel shall wish to form square in four ranks, he 
 will first cause divisions to be formed, which being 
 executed, he will command :. 
 
 1. To form square in four rankc 2. To half dis- . 
 tance, close column. 3. March (or double quick - 
 March.) 
 
•200 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 
 
 912. At the fust command, the chief of the first 
 diviBion will caution the rigbt company to face to 
 the left, and the left company to face .to the right. 
 The chiefs of the other divisions will caution their 
 divisions to move forward. 
 
 913. At the command vnirrh, the rij^ht company of 
 the first divission will form into four ranks on its left 
 file, and the left company info four ranks on its right 
 file. • The fitrmation ended, the chief of this division 
 will align it by the left. 
 
 914. The other divisions will move forward and 
 double their files, marching ; the right company of 
 each division will double on its left file, and the left 
 company on its right file. The formation completed, 
 each chief of division will command, Guide left. 
 Each chief will halt his division when it shall have 
 tiie distance of a company front in four ranks from 
 the preceding one, counting from its I'ear I'nnk, and 
 will align his division by the left. At the instant the 
 fourth division is halted, the file clo|ers will move ra- 
 pidly before its front rank. 
 
 915. The colonel will form square, re-form column, 
 and reduce «quare in four i-anks, by the same com- 
 mands and means as prescribed for a battalion in tvvo 
 ranks. 
 
 91C. If the square formed in four ranks be reduced 
 and at a halt, and the eoh»nel shall wish to form the 
 battalion into two ranks, -he will command : 
 
 1. In two ranks, undouhh files. 2. Battalion out- 
 icards— Face. ?>. March. 
 
 917. At the first command, the captains will step 
 before the centres of their respective companies, arid 
 
SCEIOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 201 
 
 those on their right will caution ttiem to face to the 
 right, and those on the loft to face to the left. 
 
 918. At the second, command, the battalion will 
 face to the right and left. 
 
 919. At the command iiiaich, each company will 
 uudonble its files and re-form into two ranks as indi- 
 cated In the school of the company No. 376 and fol- 
 lowing. Each captain will halt his company and face 
 it to the front. The formation completed, each chief 
 of division will align his division by the left. 
 
 920. If the colnran be in march, wHh divisions 
 formed in four ranks, and the colonel shall \vish to re- 
 form them into two ranks, he will command:" 
 
 1. Guide centre. 2. In two ranks y tindouhlc files. 3. 
 March. 
 
 921. The captain, placed in the centre of each di- 
 vision, will contmue 4' march straight to the front, 
 as ^^ill also the left file of the right company, and the 
 right file of the left company. Each company wiH 
 then be re-formed into two ranks, as prescribed in 
 the school of the company. 
 
 922. The battalion being fornaed, into two ranks, 
 the colonel will command. Guide left (or right.) 
 
 923. To form square in four ranks on one of the 
 flank divisions, the colonel will command : 
 
 1. To form square, in four ranks. 2. Column at half 
 distance., by division' 3. On tJie first {ov fourth) 
 division. 4. Battalion, right (or left) Face. 5. 
 March (or double quick — March.) 
 
202 SCHOOL OF THE T?ATTALI'>>f_PART V. 
 
 924. At the second coinmaTKl, each chief of division 
 will pl;u-e himself bi'fore the centvo of his division, 
 and caution it to face to the right. 
 
 925. At the fourth command, the right guide oflhe 
 first division will remain faced to th.e frbnt, the bat-, 
 talion will face to the right. 
 
 92fi. At the command march, the first file of four 
 men of tlie.tirst division will face to the front, remain- 
 ing doubled. All the other files of four men will 
 step oir together, and each in succession will close up 
 to its proper distance on the file preceding it, and 
 face to the front, remaining doubled. When the last 
 file shall have closed, the chief of division will com- 
 mand, Left — Dress. 
 
 927. The other divisions will ploy into column in 
 the same manner as with a battalion in two ra^iks. 
 observing what follows ; the chiefs of division, in- 
 stead, of allowing their divisions to file past them on 
 entering the column, will continue to lead them, and>^ 
 as each divisi(m shall arrive on a line with the right 
 guide of the first divisiion, its chief will halt the right 
 guide, who will immediately face to the front ; the first 
 file of four men will also halt at the same time and 
 face to the front, remaining doubled. The second file 
 will close on the first, and when closed, halt, and face 
 to the fr(»nt, remaining doubled. All the other files 
 will execute successively what has just been pre- 
 scribed for the second, Whenihe last file shall have 
 closed, the chief of division will command, Left— 
 Diiiiss. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 203 
 
 ''z"^. If the bftttiilion be in iiiorch, the coloifel will 
 
 •;iU)Mnd : 
 
 1. lo firm square, in four ranks. 2. On the first di- 
 tisioh,. fjrm column. 3. Battalion, by the right 
 rank. 4. March (or double qxiick—MMicii.) 
 
 029 At the second command, each chief of divi- 
 iSK II wifl step in front of the centre of his division 
 a'.-d c;iution it to face by the right flank. The chiet 
 ol ilu> first division will caution his covering sergeant 
 to halt, and remain faced to the front. 
 
 0:30. At the command march, \\ie battalion \^»illface 
 to the right ; the covering sergeant of tl.e first divi- 
 sion will halt and remain fticed to the front, the first 
 division will then form into four ranks as heretofore 
 ])rescribed. The other divisions will ploy into column 
 in the same manner as if the movement had taken 
 place from a halt. 
 
 9;}1. If the colonel should wish to form a perpen- 
 dicular square in four ranks, by double column, he 
 will command: 
 
 J. To form square, in four ranks. 2. Double column, 
 al half distance. 3. Battalion inicards — Face. 4. 
 March [or double quick— lsl\\\cn.'\ 
 
 982. At the- second commtind, the captains of com- 
 panies will place themselves before the centres of 
 their respective companies, and caution those on the 
 right to face to the left, and those on the left to face 
 to the right. The captain of the fifth company will 
 caution his covering sergeant to stand fast. 
 
204 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 
 
 933. At the third couimaud, the battalion will face 
 to the I'ft and right; at the coinniand march, the left 
 file of tlie fourth, and the right file of the fifth com- 
 pany, will face to the front, remaining donbled. ' The 
 fourth company will close puccrssivel^'hy file of fours 
 on the left file, and the fifth c-ompany, in like manner, 
 on the right fih^ ; the files will face to the front, re- 
 maining doubled. Tlie formation completed, the chief 
 of division will command, Right dress. The junior 
 captain will place himself in the interval betWeeuthe 
 two companies. 
 
 934. The other companies will close as prescribed 
 for the double c<dumn in two ranks, observing what 
 follows : each captain will halt the leading guide of 
 his company the nu»ment the head of his ctmipany ar- 
 rives on a line with the centre of the column. In the 
 right companies, the left guides will step into the line 
 of file closers, and the left file of four men will face 
 immediately to the front, remaining doubled, and by 
 the side of the right guide of the left company. The 
 companies will each form into four ranks, as pre- 
 scribed No. 92(i, the right companies on the left file, 
 and the left companies on the right file. The fi)rnia- 
 tion completed, the junior captain will place himself 
 between the two companies, and the senior will com, 
 mand. Right dress. 
 
 93.5. If the battalion be in march, the colonel will 
 command : 
 
205 
 
 louble 
 anks. 
 
 place 
 
 JCOttl- 
 
 ?m to 
 
 ice by 
 y will 
 
 i. fifth 
 
 the 
 
 1 cpm- 
 aioyie- 
 yas at 
 
 3n the 
 le will 
 
 vision 
 
 • colo- 
 ion ill 
 before 
 le left, 
 t, face 
 xly to 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALI N— PART V. 205 
 
 I. To form square, in four ranks. 2. Form doiihle 
 column. 3. Battalion by tke right and left flanks. 
 4. March Cor dovhle qitick — March J 
 
 936. At the second comTnaiTd,the captains will place 
 themselves betore the centres of their respective com- 
 panies, and those on the right will caution them to 
 face by the left flank, and those on the left to face by 
 the right flank ; the captain of the fifth company will 
 caution his covering sergeant to halt, and remain 
 faced to the front. 
 
 937. At the coiiimand marcft, the fourth and fifth 
 companies will halt. The |jattalion will face to the 
 left and right ; the covering sergeant of the fifth com- 
 pany will halt and remain faced to the front^the move- 
 ment will then be executed as if the battalion ^Yas at 
 a halt. 
 
 Oblique squares. 
 
 938. The battalion being in line of battle, when the 
 colonel shall wish to form the oblique square, he will 
 comuiand : 
 
 1. To form oblique square. 2. On the first division 
 
 form column. 
 
 939. At the second command, the lieutenant colo- 
 nel will trace the alignment of the first division in 
 the following manner : he will place himself before 
 and near the right file of this division, face to the left, 
 march twelve paces along the front rank, halt, face 
 to the right, march twelve pac«8 perpendicularly to 
 
206 8(;iIOOL (JF THE BATTALION— PART V. 
 
 the front, halt again, face to the right, and immedi- 
 ately i)laee a marker at this point. The covering ser- 
 geant of the right company will step, at the same 
 time, before its right file, faec to the left, and conform 
 the line of his shonlder»t(» that of the shoulders of the 
 marker established by the lieutenant coFonel. These 
 two markers being established, the lieut^enant colo- 
 nel will place a third marker on the same alignment, 
 at the point where the left of the division will halt. 
 
 940. The chiefs of divifsion will place themselves in 
 front of the centres of their divisions; the chief of the 
 first division will immediately establish it by a wheel 
 to the right on a fixed* ]»ivot, against the markers, 
 and align it by the left. The chiefs of the other divi- 
 sions will cautuin them to face to the right. The colo- 
 nel vpill then command : 
 
 3. Battalion right — Face. 4. MARCH (or double 
 quick — March.) 
 
 941. The three rear divisions will direct their 
 march so as to place themselves at half distance from 
 each other, and in the rear of the first division, as 
 previously indicated, observing what follows : 
 
 945. The chief of the second division, instead of 
 breaking the headmost files to the rear, will break 
 them to the front, and at the command -utarc/i, will 
 conduct his division towards the-point of entrance into 
 the column Arrived at this point, he will halt in his 
 own person, cause his division to wheel by file to the 
 
.?'^T 
 
 Fk 
 
 I aaocaoooDOoo 
 
 oo coonDODono 
 
 OOnO DDODDDDC 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 207 
 
 right, instructing the ri^ht guide to direct himself 
 paraiJelly to the firsi division ; and as soon as tiie left 
 file has passedv its chief will halt the division, and 
 align it by the left. The other divisions will break to 
 the rear, but slightly ; each will eutei: the coluuui as 
 prescribed for the second, and the moment the bat- 
 talion is ployed iuto column, the colonel will cause 
 it to form square. 
 
 94 5. The formation of a battalion intoobliqne square 
 on the left division, will bo executed according to the 
 same principles and by inverse means. f 
 
 944. Should the battalioi^be in march, the colonel 
 willfirst cause it to halt. 
 
 945. In the preceding example, the. battalion was 
 supposed to be deployed; but if it be already formed 
 in column, the desired obliquity will be established 
 by causing it to change direction by the flank; to 
 this end, the colonel will command : 
 
 1. To form oblique square. 2. Change direction by 
 the right (or left) /lank. 
 
 946. At the second command, the lieutenant colonel 
 will trace the new direction in the following manner: 
 he will place before the right and left files of the head- 
 most division, two markers, and a third on the pro- 
 longation of the first two, on the side of the change of 
 direction, and at twelve paces from the iiank of the 
 colunm. He will then place himself before the third 
 marker, march twelve paces perpendicularly to the 
 
/ 
 
 208 SCHOaL OP THE BATTALION PART V. 
 
 front, halt, and finish tracing the. new direction in the 
 manner indicated, No. S>;il>. 
 
 947. The cokmel will then ooninaand : 
 
 3. Battalion right for lcft)—Y.\CE. 4. March (or 
 double quick — March. ) 
 
 948. The change of direction having been executed, 
 the colonel will cause the square to be formed. 
 
 949. Should the column be iu march, the colonel 
 will first cau.se it to halt. 
 
 930. Obli([no squares in fDur ranks, will be execu- 
 ted by the same meaus, and according to the princi- 
 ples prescribed for the'formatiou of .squares iu four 
 ranks. 
 
 951. Whether the battalion be ployed into simple 
 or double column, the particular dispositions for the 
 formation of the square will be executed as pre- 
 scribed No. 819 and following. The division which is 
 to form the rear of the column, will be closed in mass, 
 and as soon as it is aligned, the major will rectify tlie 
 position of the ij.uides on the side of the column op- 
 posite to the direction. 
 
 952. If it be the wish of the colonel merely to pre- 
 pare for square, he will in all formations with that 
 view substitute the command prepare for square in 
 place 6i to form, sqiiare, and in that case, the last divi- 
 sion will enter the column at company distance. 
 
 Remarks on the formation of squares. 
 
 953. It is a general principle that a column by com- 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART Y. 200 
 
 pany, which is to bQ formed inio square, will first 
 form divisions, and close to half distance. Neverthe- 
 less, if it find itself suddenly threatened by cavalry 
 without sufficient time to form divisions, the colonel 
 will cause the column to close to platoon distance and 
 then form square by the commands and means which 
 have been indicated ; the leading and rearmost com- 
 panies will conform themselves to what has been pre- 
 scribed for divisions in those positions. The other 
 companies will form by platoon to the right and left 
 into line of battle, and each chief of platoon, after 
 having halted it, will place himself on the line, as if 
 the platoon were a company, and he will be covered 
 by the guide in the rear rank. 
 
 954. Abattalion in column at full distance, having 
 to form square, will always close on the leading sub- 
 division ; and a column closed in mass, will always, 
 for the same purpose, take distances by the head. 
 In either case, the second subdivision should be care- 
 ful, in taking its distance, to reckon f^om the rear 
 rank of the subdivision in front of it. 
 
 955. If a column by company should be required 
 to form square in four ranks, the doubling of files will 
 always take place ou the file next the guide. 
 
 956. When a column, disposed to form square, shall 
 be in march, it will change direction as a colunm at. 
 half distance ; thus, having to execute this movement, 
 the column will take the guide on the side opposite 
 to that to which the change of direction is to be made,, 
 if that be not already the side of the guide. 
 
 957. A column doubled on the centre at company 
 
210 SCHOOL OF TllK BATTALION— PART V. 
 
 distance or closed in mass, may be formed into square 
 according to tbe^ame principles as a simple column. 
 
 958. When a battalion is ployed, with a view to the 
 square, it will always be in rear of the right or left 
 division, in order that it may be able to con)mence 
 firing, pending the executi<in of the movement. The 
 double column also, affords this advantage, and being 
 more promptly formed fhan'any otht-r, it will habitu- 
 ally be employed, unless particular circunistanees 
 cause a different formation to be preferred. 
 
 959. A battalion, in square, will never use anj'^ other 
 than the fire by file and by lank ; the color being in 
 the line of file closers, its guard will not fall back as 
 prescribed No. 41, it will fire like the men \if the 
 company of which it forms a part. 
 
 960. If the square be formed in four ranks, the 
 first two ranks will alone execute the firings pre- 
 scribed above; the other two ranks will remain either 
 at sh(»ulder or support arms, 
 
 961. The formation of the square being often ne- 
 cessary in war, and being the most complicated of the 
 manoeuvres, it will be as frequently icj eated as the 
 supposed necessity . may require, in order to render 
 its mechanism familiar to both officers and men. 
 
 962. In the executicm of this manoeuvre, the colo- 
 nel will carefully observe that the divers movements 
 which it involves succeed each (»ther without lose of 
 time, but also without confusion; .for, if the rapidity 
 of cavalry movements requires the greatest prompti- 
 tude in the formation of squares, so, on the other 
 hand, precipitancy always results in disorder, and in 
 no circumstances is disorder more to be avoided. 
 
^^r 
 
^// 
 
 J'i 
 
 
 '! T 
 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 211 
 
 963. When the colonel shall vwish to cover. by 
 gtirniishers the movements of a column preparing to 
 form squiire, he will detach tor this purpose one or 
 two inner jjl;it<K(ns of one 'of the interior divisions of 
 the column. In this case, the exterior platoons of 
 •this division and the following subdivisions, will, ac- 
 cording to circumstances, close on the preceding sub- 
 division, in suih manner, that there may be between 
 them (mly the distance necessary for forming into 
 line. 
 
 9o4. When the oolonel shall be ready to form 
 square, he will, in order to recall the skirmishers, 
 cause to the color to be s<iunded. If on the return 
 of the skirmishers, there be not room for them to 
 form into line of battle, they. will double on the outer 
 platoons of their respective companies. 
 
 Column against cavalry. 
 
 965. When a column closed in mass has to form 
 square, it will begin by taking company distance; 
 but if so suddenly threatened by cavali-y as not to 
 allow time for this disposition, it will be formed in 
 the following manner: 
 
 966. The colonel will command : 
 
 1. Column against cavalry. 2. MARCH. 
 
 967. At the first command, the chief of the leading 
 division will caution it to- stand fast and pass behind 
 the rear rank ; in the interior divisions each cap- 
 tain will promptly designate the number of files ne- 
 
212 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 
 
 cessary to close the interval between his company and 
 the one in fret nt of it. The captains of the divisions 
 next to the one in rear, in addition to closing, thef 
 interval in front, will also close up the interval which 
 separates this division from the last; the chief of the 
 fourth -division wall caution it to face abotrt, and its 
 file closers will pass briskly before the front rank. 
 
 968. At the command march, the guides of each 
 division will place themselves rapidly in the line of 
 file closers. The first division will stand fast, the 
 fourth will face about, the outer file of each of these 
 divisions will then face outwards ; in the other divi- 
 sions the files designated for closing the intervals will 
 form to the right and left into line, but in the divi- 
 sion next to the rearmost one, the first files that 
 come into line wall close to the right or left until 
 they join the rear division. The files of each cou> 
 pany which remain in column will close on their outer 
 files, formed into line, in order to create a vacant 
 space in the middle of the column. 
 
 969. If the column be in march, the column against 
 cavalry will be formed by the same command and 
 means. At the command march, the first and fourth 
 divisions will halt and the latter division will face 
 about; the interior divisions will conform to what 
 has been prescribed above. 
 
 970. The battalion being no longer threatened by 
 cavalry, the colonel will command : 
 
 1. Form column. 2. March. 
 
 971. At the command march, the files in column 
 will close to the left and right to make room for those* 
 
SCHOOL. OF 1 HE BATTAT>ION— PART V. 213 
 
 •inline, who will retake their places in column by 
 stepping backwards, except those closing the interval 
 between the two rear divisions, who will take theit 
 places in cdlumu by a flank movement. The fourth 
 division wall face about, the guides will resume their 
 places. 
 
 97'-3. If the colonel should be so pressed m not to 
 have time to order bayonets to be fixed, the raen^ 
 will fix them, without command "or signal, at the 
 cautionary command, column against cavalry. 
 
 973. As this manoeuvre is often used in war, and 
 with decided advantage, the colonel will frequently 
 cause it to be executed, in order io render it familiar. 
 
 Article Fifteenth. 
 
 The Ratty. 
 
 974. The battalion being in line of battle, the col- 
 onel will sometimes cause the disperse to be sounded, 
 at which signal, the battalion will break and dis- 
 perse. 
 
 975. When the colonel shall wish to rally the bat- 
 talion, he will cause to the color to be sounded, and 
 at the same time place two markers and the color* 
 bearer in the direction he may wish to give the bat- 
 talion. 
 
 976. Each captain will rally his company about 
 six paces in rear of the place it is to occupy in line of 
 battle. 
 
 977. The colonel wilt cause the color-company to 
 be promptly established against the markers, and 
 
214 SCnOOL .OF THE BATTALION- PART V. 
 
 each, company by thp command of its captain will 
 be aligned on the color-company according to the 
 |)rinciple8 heretofore prescribed. 
 
 978. When the colonel shall wish to rally the bat- 
 tali<m in column, he will canse the assembly to be 
 sounded, and place i-wo mai-kcrs before the positi«»n 
 to be occupied by the first company; the captain of 
 this coinpany will rally his company in rear of the' 
 two markers, aud each of the other captains will 
 rally his compatiy at platoon distai.ce, behind the one 
 which should precede it in the order in column. 
 
 Article Sixtee^ith. 
 
 Rules for manceucring by the rear rank. 
 
 979. It may often be necessary to cause a battal- 
 ion to manoeuvre by the rear rank; when the* case 
 presents itself, the following rules will be obsei-ved. 
 
 980. The battalion , being by the front rank. When 
 the colonel shall wish to manoeuvi-e by the rear rank, 
 he will command : 
 
 I. Face by the rear rank. 2. Battalion. 3. About 
 —Face. 
 
 981. If the battalion be deployed,- this movement 
 will be executed as has been indicated for the fire by 
 the rear rank. 
 
 982. If the battalion be in column by company, or 
 by platoon, right or left in front, the chiefs of subdi- 
 vision, to take their Hew places in column, will each 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 915 
 
 pass by the left flank of his subdivision, and the file 
 closers by the right flank ; the guides will place 
 themselves in the rear rank. 
 
 983. Tf the column be formed by division, the 
 chiefs of division will each pass by the interval in 
 the centre of his division, "and the file closers by the 
 outer flanks of their respective companies; the junior 
 captain in each division will step int<» the rear rank, 
 and be covered in the front rank by the covering ser- 
 geant of the left company. 
 
 984. The lieutenant colonel will place himself 
 abreast with the leading subdivision, and the major 
 abreast with the rearmi st one. 
 
 985. The battalion being faced by the rear rank, 
 companies, divisiorfs, and wings, will preserve their 
 prior denominations respectively. " 
 
 98G. The manoeuvres by the rear rank will be ex- 
 ecuted by the same commands and on the same prin- 
 ciples as if the batt«lion faced by^ the front rank ; but 
 in such manner that when th'e battalion shall be 
 brought to its proper front, all the subdivisions may 
 find themselves in their regular oifLer from right to 
 left. 
 
 987. According to this principle, when a column 
 faced by the rear rank is deployed, the subdivisions 
 which, in line of battle by the froftt rank, ought to 
 find themselves oil the right of the subdivision on 
 which the deployment is made, will face to the left; 
 and those which ought to be placed on its left, will 
 face to the right. 
 
 988. When a battalion in line of battle, faced by 
 the rear rank, is to be pl«»yed into column, the col- 
 onel will announce, in the commands, left or right in 
 front, according as it may be intended that the first 
 
216 SCHOOL f!F THE BATTALI(»N— PART V. 
 
 or last subdivision sljall be at tbe head of the. column, 
 because the first subdivision is on the left, and the 
 last on tlie right of the battalion faced by the rear 
 rank. The column by the rear rank will take the 
 guide to the right, if the first subdivision be in front, 
 and to the left in the reverse case. 
 
 989. A column, faced by the rear rank, will be 
 bx'ought to its proper front by the means heretofore 
 prescribed. If the column be formed by company, 
 or by platoon, the chiefs of subdivision, in order to 
 take thejr new places in column, w^ill pass by the 
 left of subdivisions, now right, and the file closers by 
 the right, now left. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION, 
 
 ARRANGED INTO LESSONS. 
 
 Lesson First. 
 
 Article /. — Open ranks, No. 23; 
 
 Article If. — Close ranks, No. 29. 
 
 Article HI. — Manual of arms. No. 30. Loading at 
 
 will, No. 31. 
 Article IV. — Different fires, by the front rank, No. 
 
 39, and by the re*r rtnk. No. 54. 
 
 Lemon Second. 
 
 Article I. — Break by company to the right, No. 69, or 
 to the left. No. 74. 
 
 Article II. — March in column at the cadeLnced step, 
 a considerable distance. No. 104. Change of di- 
 rection. No, 2^1. Diminish and increase front in 
 marching, No. 198. March in retreat. No. 170. 
 
218 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 Article //A— Halt the column, No. 239. Form it 
 
 to the left or right into line of battle, No. 390. 
 
 Execute this formation, the column marching, No. 
 
 402. 
 Article IF. — Execute the countermarch, and repeat 
 
 the same movements. No. 35J. 
 Article V. — Form C(»Iumn into line of battle, i6 the 
 
 right or left, by inversion. No. 407. • 
 
 Lesson Third. 
 
 Article I. — Break by company to the rear by the 
 right or left, the b.ittalion being at a halt, -No. 87, 
 or marching. No. 94. 
 
 Article II. — March in the r-oute step, No. 198. Cause 
 to be executed, at this guit and in double quick 
 time, the divers movements incident to the column 
 in route, and cause the cadeuced step to be re- 
 sumed. 
 
 Article ///.— Form the column forward into line, of 
 battle, Nos. 440, 452, faced to tiie rear into line of 
 battle, Nos. 406, 480, the battalion being at a halt, 
 or marching. Form the column forward int(» line, 
 and continue the march in this order. No. 456. 
 
 Article IF. — Form the column on the right. No. 416, 
 or the left, No. 432, into line of battle. 
 
 Article F. — March by the flank. No. 722, and form 
 companies into line, marching. 
 
 Article FI. — The column supposed to arrive before, 
 No. 175, or behind the line of brattle, No. 184, to 
 pr«ilong it OB that line. 
 
SCHOOL « F THE BATTALION. 219 
 
 Article TV/,— Change front forward, No. 743, or in 
 rear, No. 760, on the right or left of companies, in 
 directions perpendictflar ov oblique. 
 
 Article VIII. — March by the right flank. No. 722, or 
 by the left fla nit, N(». 725. Change direction by file, 
 No. 730. Form the battalion into line of battle, 
 on the right or left, by. file, N<). 735. 
 
 Article /X— rPass the defile in retreat by the right, 
 No. 709, or by the flank. No. 720. 
 
 Lesson Fourth. 
 
 Article I. — Break by divisiorf to the rear, by the right 
 or left, the battalion being ;it a halt or marching, 
 No. 102. 
 
 Article II. — March in column by division. No. 161. 
 Diminish and increase front by company. No. 196. 
 
 Article III. — Close the column to half distance on the 
 headmost or the reaimost division,' No. 278. 
 
 Article IV. — March in c<tlnnm at half distance. No. 
 28J, and change direction. No. 2^7. 
 
 Article V. — The cohimn .being at half distance, to 
 form square at a halt. No. 817, or marching. No 
 837. 
 
 Article VI. — The battalion being in square to march 
 to the front, No. 854. Halt the square. No. 860. 
 Form column to march to the front; No 863, or in 
 retreat, No. 872. Ee-form the square, No. 875, 
 
 Article VII. — Reduce the square, No. 883. 
 
220 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 Article Vin. — Close the column in mass on the head- 
 most or rearmost division^ No. 279. ' ■ 
 
 Article IX. — March in column closed in mass, and 
 change direction by the front of subdivisions, No. 
 288. 
 
 Article X.: — Form the column against cavalry, No. 
 966. 
 
 Article XL — Take distances by the head, No. 323 and 
 330, or on rear of the column, No. 333, the column 
 being at a halt or marching. 
 
 Article XII. — The column being by" company, cause 
 to be executed the movements indicated in Nos. 3, 
 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 and 11 of this lesson. The C(.lumn 
 being at half distance, or closed in mass, to form to 
 the left or right, into line, wheel, on the rear of the 
 column, No. 502. 
 
 Article XIII. —The column being by company, form 
 divisions from a halt, No. 364, or in march, No. 
 376. 
 
 Article XIV. — The column being by division, to form 
 it to the left or right into line of battle at a halt, 
 No. 40J, or in march. No. 402. 
 
 Lesson Fifth. 
 
 Article I. — ^Th'e battalion being in line of battle, and 
 at a halt, to ploy it by division into column closed, 
 in mass on the right division, No. 119, or on the 
 left division, No. 141, or on an interior division, No. 
 143, the right or left iti front. Ploy the battalion 
 marching in line of battle on the right or left divi- 
 sion, No. 149. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE. BATTALION. 221 
 
 Article II. — Execute the countermarch, No. 352. * 
 
 Article III. — Change direction to the right, No. 307, 
 to the left, No. 313, by the flank of the c'olumn. . 
 
 Article IV. — Deploy the column on the right division. 
 No. 514, on the left division, No. 541, or on any in- 
 terior division, the column being at a halt, or 
 marching, No. 563. 
 
 Article V. — Ploy the battalion into column by divi- 
 sion at half distance marching. No. 55ii. 
 
 Article VI. — Ploy the battalion by company, closed in 
 mass, and form it on the right or left into line ol 
 battle, No. 577. , • 
 
 Article VII. — Ploy the battalion into double column, 
 at half distance, No. 777, or closed in mass. No. 
 703, the battalion being at a halt, or marching. 
 
 Article VIII. — March in this order, and change direc- 
 tion. No. 794. 
 
 Article IX. — Deploy the column at a halt. No. 796, or 
 marching. No. 800, and without suspending the 
 march. No. 802. 
 
 Article X. — The double colunin being at half dis- 
 tance, form it into line of battle faced to the right 
 or left. No. 803, the column being in march. No. 807. 
 Execute the same movement without suspending 
 the march, No. 810. 
 
222 SCHOOL OF THK BATTALION. 
 
 Artitle XL — Perpendicular or parallel squares; the 
 battalion being deployed, Nos SSS^, 895. Oblique 
 squares, tbe battalion being in line of battle, No. 
 9:^8, 01 in column, No. 945. Squares in four ranks, 
 No. 91J. 
 
 Lesson Sixth, 
 
 Ariidc /.—March in line of battle, No. 587. Halt 
 the battalion, N(5. 635, and align it, Nxj. 640. 
 
 Article 11. — Change direction in line of battle, ad- 
 vancing. No. 652, or in retreat, No. 681. Execute 
 passage of obstacles, No. 682. 
 
 Ariidc III. — Oblique march in line of battle. No 
 623. 
 
 Artide IV. — Dispjerse and rally the battalion in line 
 of battle, No. 974, and rally the battalion in col^ 
 uran by company. No. 978. 
 
 REMARKS 
 
 ON THE SCHOOL. OF THE BA'1\TAL10N. 
 
 In every course of instruction, the first lesson will 
 be executed several times in the order in which it is 
 arranged; but as soon as the battalion shall be con- 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 22a 
 
 firmed in the principles nf the lesson, the fires.^U 
 be execute.U after the advance in line, and after th(B 
 various formations into line of battle, and into square 
 Paiticiilar attention will be ijiven to the fire by file, 
 which is that principally used in war. 
 
 Every lesson of this school will be executed with 
 the utmost precision ; but the second, which com- 
 prehends the march in column, and the march in line 
 of battle, beina; of the most importance, will be 
 the oftenest repeated, especially in the begiiming. 
 
 Great attention ouffht, nlso, t(» be given to the 
 fourth lesson, which coijiprehends tlie march in col- 
 umn by division, and the dispositiims against cavalr}'. 
 
 The successive formations will sometimes be exe- 
 cuted by inversion. 
 
 In the beginning, the march in column, the march 
 in line of battle, and the march by the flank, will bo 
 executed only in quick time, and will be continued 
 until the battalion shall have become well estaolished 
 in the cadence of this step. 
 
 The non-cadenced step will be employed in this 
 school only in the repetition of the movements in- 
 cident to a C(tlumn in route, or when great celerity 
 may be required. 
 
 When it may be desired to give the men relief, 
 arms may be supported, if at a halt, or marching bv 
 the flank. 
 
 In marching by the front, arm« may be shifted to 
 the right shoulder ; but not in the march in line of 
 battle" until the battalions shall be well instructed. 
 
224 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 After arms have been carried for som^ time on the 
 right shouldf r, they may be shifted, iu likq^ manner, 
 to the left shoulder. 
 
 When a battiili«n is manoeuvring, its movements 
 will be covered 1^' skirmishers. 
 
 All the compiiuien will bo exercised, euccessively, 
 iipthis service. 
 
 Wiien a battalion, instructed in this drill, shall be 
 required to manoeuvre in the evolutions of the line, 
 its movements will be regulated by the instructions 
 contained in the third volume of the Tactics for heavy 
 Infantry, approved by the War Department, April 
 10th, 1835; 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 Vol. II. 
 
 TITLE FOURTH 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 Page. 
 
 Formation of the battalion, No. 1 , 5 
 
 Composition and march of the color-escort, No. 4, 5 
 
 Honors paid to the color, No. 11, 7 
 
 General rules and division of the school of the 
 
 battalion, No. 14, 7 
 
 PART FIRST. 
 
 Article I. —To open and close ranks, No. 22.. 9 
 
 Article II. — Manual of arms. No. 30 11 
 
 Article III. — Loading at will, and the firings. 
 No. 31 11 
 
 15* 
 
TABLE <»F CONTENTS. 
 
 PART SECOND. 
 
 Page. 
 
 Article I. — To break by company to the right, 
 No. 69. Break by company to the left, No. 74. 
 Break by division, No. 75. To break by com- 
 pany, marching. No. 84. 18 
 
 Article II. — Break to the rear by the right or 
 left of companies, No. 87. Break to the rear 
 by the right or left of companie^ii, marching, 
 No. 94. Advance or retire by the right or left 
 of companies. No. 105. Advance or retire by 
 the right or left of companies, marching. No. 
 110. Advancing or retiring, by the right or 
 left of companies, to form line to the front. 
 No. 113 23 
 
 Article III. — Ploy the battalion into close col- 
 umn on the first division. No. 119. Ploy the 
 battalion into close column on the fourth divi- 
 sion. No. 141. Ploy the battalion into close 
 column on any interior division, No. 143. Bat- 
 talion being in march, to ploy it into column on 
 the first division. No. 149 29 
 
 PART THIRD. 
 
 Article I. — March in column at full distance. 
 No. 1G4. Column being in march, to execute 
 the about, No. 170. Column arriving in front 
 
table of contents. -227 
 
 Page. 
 
 of the line of bottle, to prolong it on this line, 
 No. 175. Column arriving behind the line of 
 battlt', to prolong it on this line. No. 184. Col- 
 umn arriving on the right or the left of the line 
 of b.ittle, to prohtng it on this line, No. 188. 
 • Manner of prolonging a line by markers, No. 
 189 37 
 
 Article II.— Column in route, No. 198 48 
 
 Article III. — Change of direction in column at 
 full distance, No. 231 55 
 
 Article IV.— Halt the column. No. 239 57 
 
 Article V. — Close the column to half distance, 
 or in mass. No. 252. Close the column on the 
 eighth company, No. 267. Execute this move- 
 ment, marching. No. 273 60 
 
 Article VI. — March in column at half distance, 
 or closed in mass. No. 281 65 
 
 Article VII. — Change direction in column at 
 half distance, No. 287 66 
 
 Article VIII. — Change direction of a column 
 closed in mass, marching, No. 288. Change 
 direction of a column, ch)sed iu mass, from a 
 halt. No. 306 67 
 
 Article IX.— Take distances by the head of the 
 colunm, No. 323. Take distances by the rear 
 of the column. No 3.33. Take distances on the 
 head of the column. No. 341 73 
 
 Article X. — Countermarch of a column at full 
 
 color half distance. No. 351 Countermarch of a 
 umn cloi^ed in mn ss, No. 352 79 
 
228 table of contents. 
 
 Page. 
 
 Article XI. — Being in column by company, 
 closed in mass, to form divisions, No. 364. To 
 form divisions, marching, No. 37G 81 
 
 PART FOURTH. 
 
 Article I. — Manner of determining the line of 
 battle,No. 389 87 
 
 Article II. — To form a column, at full^distance, 
 to the left into line of battle. No. 390. To form 
 a column to the right i to line of battle. No. :^99. 
 A column being in march, to form it into line of 
 battle. No. 402, To form a column into line of 
 battle, and to move it forvi^ard, No. 403. By in- 
 version to the right or left into line of battle, 
 No. 407. Column at full distance, to form it on 
 the right or left into line of battle. No. 414. 
 Column at full distance, forward into line of 
 battle, No. 440. Foru^ard into line of battle, 
 marching, No. 452. Column at full distance, 
 faced to the rear into line of battle, No. 466. 
 Execute this movement, marching, No. 479... 87 
 
 Article III. — Formation in line of battle by 
 two movements, No. 485 110 
 
 Article IV. — Different modes of forming col- 
 umn at half distance, to the left or right, into 
 line of battle, No. 501. By the rear of column, 
 left or right, into line, wheel, No. 503. Column 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 229 
 
 Page. 
 
 at half distance, on the right or left, into line. 
 No 507. Column, at half distance, forward 
 into line. No. 508. Column, at half distance, 
 
 faced to the rear into line. No. 509. 113 
 
 Article V. — Deployment of columns closed in 
 mass, No. 510. Deployment on the first divi- 
 sion. No. 514. To deploy, whilst marching, on 
 the first division, No. 532. To deploy without 
 halting the column, and to continue marching, 
 No. 536. To deploy on the fourth division, No. 
 541. To deploy, whilst marching, on the fourth 
 division, No. 556. To deploy on an interior di- 
 vision, No. 563. To deploy, whilst rairching, 
 on an interior division, No. 567. '. 116 
 
 PART FIFTH. 
 
 Article L— To advance in line of battle. No. 587. 132 
 
 Article IT. — Oblique march in line of battle, 
 No. 623 141 
 
 Article III. — To halt the battalion, marching 
 in line of battle, and to align it. No. 635 143 
 
 Article IV. — Change of direction in marching 
 in line of battle. No. 652 146 
 
 Article V. — To march in retreat in line of bat- 
 tle, No. 664 : 149 
 
 Article VI. — To halt the battalion, marching in 
 retreat, and to face it to the front, No. 676.. 151 
 
230 table of contents. 
 
 Pagi:. 
 
 Article VII.— Chanjire of direction, in n);ireh- 
 ing in retreat, No. 681 152 
 
 Article VIIl. — Passage of obstacles, advanc- 
 ii g and retreating, No. 682 153 
 
 Article IX. — To pass a defile, in retreat, by the 
 right or lel't flank, No. 710 159 
 
 Article X.— To march by the flank, No. 722.. 162 
 
 Article XI.— To form the battalion on the right 
 or left, by file, into line of battle. No. 735 164 
 
 Article XII. — Change of front perpendicularly 
 forward, No. 743. Change front foiward on 
 the first company, marching. No. 754. Change 
 of front perpendicularly to the rear. No. 76J . . 165 
 
 Article XIII. — To ploy the battalion into col- 
 umn, doubled on the centre. No. 776. To foriji 
 double column, marching, No. 787. Deployment 
 of the double column, faced to the front. No. 7i)6. 
 Deployment of the double column marching, 
 No. 800. To form the double column into line 
 of battle, faced to the right or left. No. 803. To 
 form the double column into line of battle, fac- 
 ed to the right or left, marching, No. 807 172 
 
 Article XIV. — Dispositions against cavalry No. 
 817. A column being in march at full distance, 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 231 
 
 Page. 
 
 to form square, No. 837. If the colimin be closed 
 in mass, to make dispositions to form square. No. 
 847. The l)attalion being in square, to move it in 
 advance by one of its fronts. No. 854. To halt 
 the square, No. 8Gii. The battalion being in 
 S([uare, to form column to n)arch to the front, a 
 distance greater tlnin thirty paces, No. 863. To 
 march the square in retreat a greater distance 
 than thirty paces, No 872. The battalion being 
 ill square, to march it in advance, or in retreat, a 
 distance less than thirty paces. No. 87(3. The 
 column marching to the front, to march it in re- 
 treat. No. 879. The colunm marching in retreat, 
 to march it to the front. No. 88J . To reduce the 
 square, No. 883. T(tf(u-m scpiarefrom line of bat- 
 tle. No. 885. Perpendicular square. No. 888. 
 Perpendicular square, marching, No. 890. To 
 form square by double column, No. 892. To form 
 square by double c<»lunm, marching, No. 894. 
 Obsei'vations relative to the formatifui of squares 
 in two ranks. No. 896. The c(»lumn being 
 formed of four divisions, to place the inner pla- 
 toons of tlie third division m reserve. No. 898. 
 Squares in four ranks. No. 910. The square 
 formed in four ranks being reduced, and at a halt, 
 to fiu-ni the battalion into two ranks. No. 916. 
 The colunm being in march with divisions form- 
 ed in four ranks, to re-form it into two ranks. No. 
 920. To form sqtuire in four ranks on one of the 
 flank divisions. No. 923. Form square in four 
 ranks on the first division, marching. No. 928. 
 Form perpendicular square in four ranks, by 
 double column, No. 931. Form perpendicular 
 
•23^ TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 Page. 
 
 square in four rauks, by double column, march- 
 ing, No. 935. Oblique square. No. 938. Oblique 
 square, being in column, No. 945. Column 
 against cavalry, No. 965. The battalion being no 
 longer threatened by cavalry, to form column,- 
 
 No. 970 182 
 
 Article XV.— The rally. No. 974 213 
 
 Article XYL— Rules for manoeuvring by the 
 rear rank, No. 979 214 
 
 THE END. 
 
23- 
 
 / 
 
 \ 
 

o 
 
'^1^' 
 
 /•v